JP2023111091A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve a degree of freedom of a display of a symbol.SOLUTION: In a pachinko machine 1, when a specified result ([big winning] or [small winning]) is determined by a start determination, specification figure symbol alignment information is changed after a stop display of performance symbols a1, a2 and a5 based on the special figure symbol alignment information corresponding to the specified result. By this constitution, the special figure symbol alignment information is changed after the stop display of the performance symbols a1, a2 and a5 based on the special figure symbol alignment corresponding to the specified result is performed, and a variation display of the performance symbols a1, a2 and a5 can be started on the basis of the changed special figure symbol alignment information. A form of the performance symbols a1, a2 and a5 at the stop display, and a form of the performance symbols a1, a2 and a5 at a start of a succeeding variation display can be made to differ from each other, and a degree of freedom of a display of the performance symbols a1, a2 and a5 can be improved.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 50

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine that displays symbols.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine that displays symbols is known (see Patent Document 1).
In this game machine, when a big win is won, after the decorative patterns of the big win mode are temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative patterns are replaced and the decorative patterns of the special mode are stopped and displayed.

JP 2015-167640 A

However, in the conventional game machine, it is not possible to make the mode of the stationary displayed decorative symbols different from the mode of the decorative symbols at the start of the next variable display, and there is a possibility that the degree of freedom in displaying the symbols is lowered. There is
An object of the present invention is to improve the degree of freedom of design display.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the first invention comprises game determination means for executing game determination, storage means for storing symbol information according to the result of the game determination, and a game machine based on the symbol information. and display control means for controlling the display of symbols, and when a specified result is determined by the game determination, after stopping display of the symbols based on the symbol information corresponding to the specified result, the specified It is characterized in that it can be changed to the pattern information that does not correspond to the result.
In the gaming machine according to the first aspect, when a specific result is determined by the game determination, the symbols are stopped and displayed based on the pattern information corresponding to the specific result, and then changed to the pattern information not corresponding to the specific result. be.
This makes it possible to start the variable display of symbols based on the symbol information not corresponding to the specified result after executing the stop display of the symbols based on the symbol information corresponding to the specified result. Therefore, the mode of the symbols in the stop display can be made different from the mode of the symbols at the start of the next variable display, and the degree of freedom in displaying the symbols can be improved.
Here, the game determination corresponds to the starting determination described later. A main control board 200 (steps S11-6, S11-7, S11-11), which will be described later, corresponds to the game determination means. As the symbol information, the special figure appearance information to be described later corresponds. As the storage means, a special figure appearing information storage area, which will be described later, corresponds. As the pattern, production patterns a1, a2, and a5, which will be described later, correspond. The display control means corresponds to the later-described effect control board 300 (steps S50-6, S51-1). The specified result corresponds to a "big win" or "minor win", which will be described later.

A gaming machine according to a second invention is characterized in that, in the gaming machine according to the first invention, the symbol information can be changed to the symbol information that is not set according to the result of the game determination.
In the gaming machine according to the second aspect, it is possible to recognize that the symbol information has been changed from the symbols displayed based on the changed symbol information.
Here, as the symbol information that is not set according to the result of the game determination, the special symbol appearing information that designates a "special lost symbol" to be described later corresponds.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of design display.

1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a diagram showing the front of the game board, and schematically showing a part particularly necessary for explanation. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the control system of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the winning probability of various lotteries. It is a diagram showing the winning type of normal symbol lottery. It is a figure which shows the winning classification of special design lottery. It is a figure which shows the transition of a game state. 4 is a flowchart showing CPU initialization processing; 4 is a flowchart showing main loop processing; 7 is a flow chart showing saving processing at power-off. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing dynamic port output processing; 4 is a flowchart showing performance display device output processing. 8 is a flowchart showing setting-related processing; 4 is a flowchart showing switch management processing; It is a flow chart which shows normal figure starting ball detection processing. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 starting ball detection process. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 starting ball detection process. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol random number acquisition process. It is a flow chart showing a special game management process. It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation waiting process. 7 is a flow chart showing a number cutting management process; It is a flow chart showing processing during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows processing during a special figure stop. It is a flow chart showing a first big winning opening pre-opening process. It is a flow chart showing a first big winning opening opening control process. It is a flow chart showing a first big winning opening closing effective process. It is a flow chart showing a wait process for the end of the opening of the first big winning opening. It is a flow chart which shows a second big prize winning opening pre-opening process. It is a flow chart which shows a second big winning opening opening control process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd big winning a prize mouth closing effective process. It is a flow chart showing a wait process for the end of opening the second big winning opening. 10 is a flowchart showing a special electric service open/close switching process; It is a flow chart showing normal game management processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure fluctuation waiting processing. 7 is a flow chart showing a number cutting management process; It is a flow chart which shows processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flow chart which shows processing during normal figure stop. It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessary product opening pre-processing. 10 is a flowchart showing normal electric open/close switching processing; It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessory opening control processing. It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessary product closing effective processing. It is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product open end wait processing. 4 is a flowchart showing performance display device control processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen 31a. It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation command reception process. It is a flow chart showing a special figure stop command reception process. It is a flow chart showing normal figure fluctuation command reception processing. It is a flow chart which shows normal figure stop command reception processing. 4 is a flow chart showing an ending command reception process; 9 is a flowchart showing a power failure recovery command reception process;

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In this embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1. FIG.

(Overall Configuration of Pachinko Machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine.
The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame unit 2, an inner frame unit 3, a front frame unit 4, and a game board unit 10. - 特許庁
The outer frame unit 2, inner frame unit 3 and front frame unit 4 are fixed to each other via a hinge mechanism. Thereby, the inner frame unit 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2 . Also, the front frame unit 4 can be opened and closed with respect to each of the inner frame unit 3 and the outer frame unit 2 .

The outer frame unit 2 includes a rectangular frame (outer frame). The outer frame provided in the outer frame unit 2 is fixed to the island facilities of the game arcade.
The inner frame unit 3 includes a rectangular frame (inner frame). The inner frame unit 3 is arranged inside the outer frame unit 2 .
The front frame unit 4 is formed in a rectangular door shape. The door unit 4 includes a transparent plate 4a arranged substantially in the center, a decorative portion 4b arranged around the transparent plate 4a, a tray unit 5 arranged below the transparent plate 4a, and a tray. and a firing handle 6 disposed laterally of the unit 5 .
The transparent plate 4a is formed in a flat plate shape from a transparent material such as resin or glass. The decorative portion 4b is made of a transparent or translucent resin material and has a shape that protrudes forward. At each upper corner of the decorative portion 4b, there is provided a sound removing portion 4c in which a speaker 22 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. Each sound removal part 4c is provided with a plurality of sound removal holes through which the sound output by the speaker 22 is passed. A frame lamp 20 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the decorative portion 4b. The frame lamp 20 includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The receiving tray unit 5 has a receiving tray 5a for receiving game balls (rental balls and prize balls), and an effect button 5b and a rotary selector 5c provided on the front side of the receiving tray 5a.
The effect button 5b is formed in a substantially columnar shape and arranged so as to protrude upward from the tray unit 5. - 特許庁The effect button 5b can be pressed by the player (an operation of pressing downward). Inside the tray unit 5, a first operation detection switch 24 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a pressing operation of the effect button 5b is arranged. The first operation detection switch 24 outputs a first operation signal to the effect control board 300 (see FIG. 3) each time the effect button 5b is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called "jog dial") is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and arranged so as to surround the production button 5b. The rotary selector 5c can be rotated by the player (rotated about the cylindrical axis). Inside the tray unit 5, a second operation detection switch 25 (see FIG. 3) is arranged for detecting a rotation operation of the rotary selector 5c. The second operation detection switch 25 outputs a second operation signal to the effect control board 300 each time the rotary selector 5c is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60[°]).

A lending operation unit 7 is arranged on the upper surface of the tray unit 5 . The rental operation unit 7 has a ball rental button 7a, a return button 7b, and a frequency display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicably connected to a CR unit (not shown) capable of reading and updating information recorded on the prepaid card. Then, when a prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit, the remaining credits of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit are displayed on the count display device 7c.
Further, when the ball lending button 7a is operated while the prepaid card is inserted in the CR unit, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the receiving tray 5a. At this time, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded in the prepaid card is updated according to the number of game balls paid out, and the updated remaining frequency of the valuable medium is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, when the return button 7b is operated while the prepaid card with the remaining credits of the valuable medium is inserted in the CR unit, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit.
Here, the prepaid cart includes, for example, a magnetic storage medium, a storage IC built-in medium, and the like.
The shooting handle 6 can be rotated by the player. Inside the firing handle 6 is disposed a firing volume 410 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the angle at which the firing handle 6 is rotated. The shooting volume 410 outputs a detection signal corresponding to the detected angle to the payout control board 400 (see FIG. 3).

(Configuration of game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the front of the game board unit, and schematically showing a part particularly necessary for explanation. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen 31a.
The game board unit 10 is supported by the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the game board unit 10 is attached to the inner side of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3 . Thereby, the game board unit 10 is arranged on the back side of the front frame unit 4 . A player can visually recognize a later-described game board 11 (game area 30) through the transparent plate 4a. In this embodiment, a game area 30, which will be described later, is formed between the back surface of the transparent plate 4a and the front surface of the game board 11. As shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board unit 10 includes a set board (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set board, and various effect devices (main image display device 31, sub image display device 32, movable body unit, etc.).
The set plate is formed in a box shape with an open front side. An opening formed by a through hole is provided in a substantially central portion of the back plate of the set plate.

The game board 11 is attached to the front side of the set board.
In front of the game board 11, a game area 30 is defined by the inner rail 12, the outer rail 14, and the like. In the game area 30, there are a left path (left hitting area) formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 and a right path (right hitting area) formed on the right side of the main image display device 31 as paths along which game balls flow down. area) and are configured.
In addition, on the front surface of the game board 11, the inner guide surface 12a of the inner rail 12 and the outer guide surface 14c of the outer rail 14 are arranged facing each other with a predetermined spacing. A shooting path r1 for guiding the game ball shot by the game ball shooting device 430 to the game area 30 is formed between the inner guide surface 12a and the outer guide surface 14c.
Further, in the game area 30, a guiding path r2 is formed to guide (guide) the game ball shot from the shooting path r1 to the right side path. The guide passage r2 is formed at the upper end of the game area 30. As shown in FIG. The guide path r2 is formed above the main image display device 31. As shown in FIG. The guide passage r2 extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side.
In this embodiment, the outer guide surface 14c constitutes the outer peripheral surface ra of the guide passage r2. A decorative portion 33 is provided above the opening in the front of the game board 11 . The upper surface of the decorative portion 33 forms the inner peripheral surface of the guide passage r2.
The game ball shot by the game ball shooting device 430 passes through the shooting path r1 and flows into the game area 30. - 特許庁At this time, when the momentum of the shot game ball is weak, the game ball that has passed through the shooting path r1 flows into the left path. On the other hand, when the momentum of the shot game ball is strong, the game ball that has passed through the shooting path r1 passes through the guide path r2 and flows into the right path.

A board lamp 21 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the game area 30 of the game board 11 . The board lamp 21 includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.
The main image display device 31 is attached to the back side of the set plate. The main image display device 31 is configured by a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display. The main image display device 31 has a display screen 31a capable of displaying effect images.

As shown in FIG. 45, the display screen 31a includes a special figure mini symbol display area A1, a special figure fourth symbol display area A2, and a general figure mini symbol as display areas related to the identification information for the effect (effect symbol). It is possible to configure a display area A3, a normal-fourth symbol display area A4, and a main effect symbol display area A5.
The special figure mini-symbol display area A1 includes three special figure display areas (not shown). In each special figure display area, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the special figure mini effect pattern a1. Each special figure mini effect pattern a1 is a pattern for effect, and includes identification information (design) such as numbers, letters, symbols, and characters. In this embodiment, 9 types of special mini effect patterns a1 (special mini effect patterns a1 displaying each identification information of numbers "1" to "9") are defined.
In the special figure 4th design display area A2, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the special figure 4th production design a2. The special figure 4th production pattern a2 is a pattern for production, and includes identification information (design) such as numbers, letters, symbols, and characters. In this embodiment, two types of special figure 4th production pattern a2 (special figure 4th production pattern a2 displaying each identification information of "◯" and "x") are defined.

In the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 4th symbol display area A2, a display for notifying the result of a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) to be described later is executed. Then, by combining the three special mini effect symbols a1 stopped and displayed in the special mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure fourth effect symbol a2 stopped and displayed in the special figure fourth design display area A2, The result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is notified.
That is, the variable display of the effect symbols a1 and a2 executed in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 4th symbol display area A2 is a special figure display device (special figure 1 display device or special figure 2 display device ) corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) executed in . In addition, the stop display of the effect symbols a1 and a2 executed in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 4th symbol display area A2 is performed in the special figure display device (special figure 1 display device or special figure 2 display device) It corresponds to the stop display of the executed special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol).

Concretely, in this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel with each other in terms of time. Then, during the variable display of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device, as a display corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 (each special figure display area) While the variable display of the figure mini effect pattern a1 is performed, the variable display of the special figure 4th effect symbol a2 is performed in the special figure 4th symbol display area A2. Also, during the stop display of the first special symbol on the special figure 1 display device, as a display corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol, in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 (each special figure display area) The stop display of the mini figure effect pattern a1 is performed, and the stop display of the special figure fourth effect symbol a2 is performed in the special figure fourth symbol display area A2. At this time, the display of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device and the display of the effect symbols a1 and a2 in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 4th symbol display area A2 are displayed in a fluctuating manner. The time, the contents of the variable display, the time when the variable display ends, the time when the stop display starts, and the lottery results indicated by the stopped symbols are associated with each other.
On the other hand, during the variable display of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device, as a display corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 (each special figure display area) While the variable display of the figure mini effect pattern a1 is performed, the variable display of the special figure 4th effect symbol a2 is performed in the special figure 4th symbol display area A2. Also, during the stop display of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device, as a display corresponding to the stop display of the second special symbol, in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 (each special figure display area), The stop display of the mini figure effect pattern a1 is performed, and the stop display of the special figure fourth effect symbol a2 is performed in the special figure fourth symbol display area A2. At this time, the display of the second special symbol on the special figure 2 display device and the display of the effect symbols a1 and a2 in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 4th symbol display area A2 are displayed in a variable manner. The time, the contents of the variable display, the time when the variable display ends, the time when the stop display starts, and the lottery results indicated by the stopped symbols are associated with each other.
Here, the variable display of the effect symbols a1 and a2 means that the type of the special symbol mini effect symbol a1 displayed in each special symbol display area of the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 is sequentially changed and the special symbol The kind of special-figure 4th design a2 displayed in 4th design display area A2 says the display changed sequentially. In addition, the stop display of the performance symbols a1 and a2 means that one kind of special mini performance symbol a1 is stopped in each special symbol display area of the special mini symbol display area A1, and the fourth special symbol is displayed. In the area A2, it refers to a display in which one type of special figure fourth symbol a2 is stopped.

The general pattern mini-symbol display area A3 includes three general pattern display areas (not shown). In each general-purpose display area, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the general-purpose mini effect pattern a3. Each general-purpose mini production pattern a3 is a pattern for production, and includes identification information (design) such as numbers, letters, symbols, and characters. In this embodiment, nine types of general-purpose mini effect symbols a3 (normal-size mini effect symbols a3 displaying each identification information of numbers "1" to "9") are defined.
The special figure mini effect pattern a1 and the general figure mini effect pattern a3 are configured by different display modes. That is, at least one of the "design (shape)" and "color (color scheme)" differs between the special figure mini effect pattern a1 and the normal figure mini effect pattern a3. Specifically, the special figure mini effect pattern a1 is configured by a first design (shape) and configured by a first color (color scheme). On the other hand, the normal figure mini production pattern a3 is composed of a second design (shape) different from the first design (shape), and is composed of a second color (color scheme) different from the first color (color scheme). there is This makes it possible for the player to easily distinguish between the special mini effect symbol a1 corresponding to the special symbol and the normal mini effect symbol a3 corresponding to the normal symbol.
In the normal pattern 4th pattern display area A4, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the normal pattern 4th production pattern a4. The normal figure fourth production pattern a4 is a pattern for production, and includes identification information (design) such as numbers, letters, symbols, and characters. In this embodiment, two types of normal-figure 1 fourth production pattern a4 (normal-figure fourth production pattern a4 displaying each identification information of "O" and "x") are defined.

In the general-purpose mini symbol display area A3 and the general-purpose fourth symbol display area A4, a display for notifying the result of a normal symbol lottery, which will be described later, is performed. Then, by combining the three normal mini effect symbols a3 stop-displayed in the normal mini-symbol display area A3 and the 4th normal-sign effect symbol a4 stop-displayed in the 4th normal-figure pattern display area A4, The result of the normal symbol lottery is notified.
In other words, the variable display of the effect symbols a3 and a4 executed in the general-purpose mini symbol display area A3 and the general-purpose fourth symbol display area A4 corresponds to the variable display of the normal symbols executed in the general-purpose symbol display device to be described later. ing. In addition, the stop display of the effect symbols a3 and a4 executed in the normal-figure mini-symbol display area A3 and the normal-figure fourth symbol display area A4 corresponds to the stop-display of the normal-figure executed in the normal-figure display device. .
Specifically, during the variable display of the normal pattern in the general pattern display device, in the general pattern mini pattern display area A3 (each special pattern display area), the variable display of the general pattern mini effect pattern a3 is executed, In the fourth pattern display area A4, the variable display of the fourth production pattern a4 for the normal pattern is executed. In addition, during the stop display of the normal pattern on the general pattern display device, in the general pattern mini pattern display area A3 (each special pattern display area), the normal pattern mini effect pattern a3 is stopped and displayed, In the 4-symbol display area A4, the stop display of the normal-symbol fourth effect symbol a4 is executed. At this time, the display of the normal symbols on the general-purpose display device and the display of the effect symbols a3 and a4 in the general-purpose mini-symbol display area A3 and the general-purpose fourth symbol display area A4 are determined by the time when the variable display is started and the fluctuation The content of the display, the time when the variable display ends, the time when the stop display starts, and the lottery results indicated by the stopped symbols are associated with each other.
Here, the variable display of the production patterns a3 and a4 means that the type of the general-sized mini production pattern a3 displayed in each special-design display area of the general-sized mini-symbol display area A3 is sequentially changed, and This is a display in which the type of the fourth normal pattern a4 displayed in the fourth pattern display area A4 is sequentially changed. In addition, the stop display of the production patterns a3 and a4 means that one type of the general pattern mini production pattern a3 is stopped in each special pattern display area of the general pattern mini pattern display area A3, and the general pattern 4th pattern is displayed. In the area A4, it refers to a display in which one kind of normal fourth symbol a4 is stopped.

The main effect symbol display area A5 includes three effect symbol display areas (not shown). In each effect symbol display area, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the main effect symbol a5. Each main effect pattern a5 is a pattern for effect, and includes identification information (symbols) such as numbers, letters, symbols, and characters. In this embodiment, 9 kinds of main effect symbols a5 (main effect symbols a5 displaying each identification information of numbers "1" to "9") are defined.
In particular, a first main effect pattern a5 and a second main effect pattern a5 are defined as types of the main effect pattern a5. That is, in the present embodiment, nine types of first main effect patterns a5 (first main effect patterns a5 displaying identification information of numbers "1" to "9") and nine types of second A main effect symbol a5 (a second main effect symbol a5 displaying each identification information of the numbers "1" to "9") is defined.
The first main effect pattern a5 and the second main effect pattern a5 are configured in different display modes. That is, the first main effect pattern a5 and the second main effect pattern a5 are different in at least one of "design (shape)" and "color (color scheme)". Specifically, the first main effect pattern a5 is configured with a first design (shape) and is configured with a first color (color scheme). On the other hand, the second main production pattern a5 is composed of a second design (shape) different from the first design (shape), and is composed of a second color (color scheme) different from the first color (color scheme). ing. This makes it possible for the player to easily distinguish between the first main effect symbol a5 corresponding to the special symbol and the second main effect symbol a5 corresponding to the normal symbol.

When the normal state, which will be described later, is occurring, a display for notifying the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is executed in the main effect symbol display area A5. At this time, in the main effect symbol display area A5, a display for notifying the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is executed using the first main effect symbol a5. . Then, the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is notified by the combination of the three first main performance symbols a5 stopped and displayed in the main performance symbol display area A5.
That is, when the normal state is occurring, the variable display of the first main effect symbol a5 executed in the main effect symbol display area A5 is the special mini effect symbol a1 executed in the special mini symbol display area A1. It supports variable display. Also, when the normal state is occurring, the stop display of the first main effect symbol a5 executed in the main effect symbol display area A5 is the special mini effect symbol a1 executed in the special mini symbol display area A1. Supports stop display.
Specifically, when the normal state is occurring, during the fluctuation display of the special design (first special design or second special design) in the special design display device (special design 1 display device or special design 2 display device), As a display corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the first main effect symbol a5 is executed in the main effect symbol display area A5 (each effect symbol display area). In other words, when the normal state is occurring, during the variable display of the special mini effect symbol a1, the main effect symbol display area A5 (each effect symbol display area), the variable display of the first main effect symbol a5 is executed. Also, when the normal state is occurring, during the stop display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the special figure display device (special figure 1 display device or special figure 2 display device), the special As a display corresponding to the stop display of the symbols, the stop display of the first main effect symbol a5 is executed in the main effect symbol display area A5 (each effect symbol display area). In other words, when the normal state is occurring, during the stop display of the special mini effect symbol a1, the main effect symbol display area A5 (each effect symbol display area), the stop display of the first main effect symbol a5 is executed.

The same number of production symbols are displayed in the main production symbol display area A5 and the special mini-symbol display area A1. That is, three first main effect patterns a5 are displayed in the main effect pattern display area A5, and three special mini effect patterns a1 are displayed in the special mini-symbol display area A1. Specifically, the main effect symbol display area A5 includes a first effect symbol display area, a second effect symbol display area, and a third effect symbol display area. Also, the special figure mini-symbol display area A1 includes a first special figure display area, a second special figure display area, and a third special figure display area. The first main effect symbol a5 displayed in the first effect symbol display area of the main effect symbol display area A5 is the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display area of the special symbol mini symbol display area A1. It corresponds to the mini production pattern a1. Then, the first main effect symbol a5 displayed in the first effect symbol display area of the main effect symbol display area A5, and the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display area of the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 The mini-figure pattern a1 has a common (same/similar) display mode (same "design (shape)" and "color (color scheme)" in this embodiment). Also, the first main effect symbol a5 displayed in the second effect symbol display area of the main effect symbol display area A5 is the special symbol displayed in the second special symbol display area of the special symbol mini symbol display area A1. It corresponds to the mini production pattern a1. Then, the first main effect symbol a5 displayed in the second effect symbol display area of the main effect symbol display area A5, and the special symbol displayed in the second special symbol display area of the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 The mini-figure pattern a1 has a common (same/similar) display mode (same "design (shape)" and "color (color scheme)" in this embodiment). Furthermore, the first main effect symbol a5 displayed in the third effect symbol display area of the main effect symbol display area A5 is the special symbol displayed in the third special symbol display area of the special symbol mini symbol display area A1. It corresponds to the mini production pattern a1. Then, the first main effect symbol a5 displayed in the third effect symbol display area of the main effect symbol display area A5, and the special symbol displayed in the third special symbol display area of the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 The mini-figure pattern a1 has a common (same/similar) display mode (same "design (shape)" and "color (color scheme)" in this embodiment).
As described above, while the normal state is occurring, the three first main effect symbols a5 displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5 are the three special mini effect symbols displayed in the special mini symbol display area A1. The player can easily recognize that it corresponds to a1.

On the other hand, when a time saving state (working time saving state 1, working time saving state 2, or working time saving state 3) is occurring, a display for notifying the result of the normal design lottery is executed in the main effect symbol display area A5. . At this time, in the main effect symbol display area A5, a display for notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery is executed using the second main effect symbol a5. Then, the result of the normal symbol lottery is informed by the combination of the three second main effect symbols a5 stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5.
That is, when the time-saving state (time-saving state 1, time-saving state 2, or time-saving state 3) is occurring, the variation display of the second main effect symbol a5 executed in the main effect symbol display area A5 is the normal figure mini It corresponds to the variable display of the general pattern mini effect pattern a4 executed in the pattern display area A3. Also, when the time-saving state (time-saving state 1, time-saving state 2, or time-saving state 3) is occurring, the stop display of the second main effect symbol a5 executed in the main effect symbol display area A5 is the normal mini It corresponds to the stop display of the general pattern mini effect pattern a3 executed in the pattern display area A3.
Specifically, when the time-saving state (time-saving state 1, time-saving state 2, or time-saving state 3) is occurring, during the variable display of the normal symbols in the normal figure display device, it corresponds to the variable display of the normal symbols. As a display, a variable display of the second main effect symbol a5 is executed in the main effect symbol display area A5 (each effect symbol display area). In other words, when the time-saving state (time-saving state 1, time-saving state 2, or time-saving state 3) is occurring, during the variable display of the normal mini production pattern a3, the variable display of the normal mini production pattern a3 As a corresponding display, a variable display of the second main effect symbol a5 is executed in the main effect symbol display area A5 (each effect symbol display area). In addition, when the time saving state (time saving state 1, working time saving state 2, or working time saving state 3) is occurring, during the stop display of the normal design in the normal display device, as a display corresponding to the stop display of the normal design , in the main effect symbol display area A5 (each effect symbol display area), the stop display of the second main effect symbol a5 is executed. In other words, when the time-saving state (time-saving state 1, time-saving state 2, or time-saving state 3) is occurring, during the stop display of the normal mini effect pattern a3, the stop display of the normal mini effect pattern a3 As a corresponding display, the second main effect symbol a5 is stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5 (each effect symbol display area).

The same number of performance symbols are displayed in the main performance symbol display area A5 and the normal mini symbol display area A3. That is, three second main effect symbols a5 are displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5, and three normal mini effect symbols a3 are displayed in the normal mini symbol display area A3. Specifically, the main effect symbol display area A5 includes a first effect symbol display area, a second effect symbol display area, and a third effect symbol display area. In addition, the general-purpose mini-symbol display area A3 includes a first general-purpose diagram display area, a second general-purpose diagram display area, and a third general-purpose diagram display area. The second main effect symbol a5 displayed in the first effect symbol display area of the main effect symbol display area A5 is the general symbol displayed in the first general symbol display area of the mini symbol display area A3. It corresponds to the mini production pattern a3. Then, the second main effect symbol a5 displayed in the first effect symbol display area of the main effect symbol display area A5, and the normal symbol displayed in the first general symbol display area of the mini symbol display area A3. The mini-figure effect pattern a3 has a common (same/similar) display mode (same "design (shape)" and "color (color scheme)" in this embodiment). In addition, the second main effect symbol a5 displayed in the second effect symbol display area of the main effect symbol display area A5 is the general symbol displayed in the second normal symbol display area of the mini symbol display area A3. It corresponds to the mini production pattern a3. Then, the second main effect symbol a5 displayed in the second effect symbol display area of the main effect symbol display area A5, and the normal symbol displayed in the second normal symbol display area of the normal symbol mini symbol display area A3. The mini-figure effect pattern a3 has a common (same/similar) display mode (same "design (shape)" and "color (color scheme)" in this embodiment). Furthermore, the second main effect symbol a5 displayed in the third effect symbol display area of the main effect symbol display area A5 is the general symbol displayed in the third normal symbol display area of the mini symbol display area A3. It corresponds to the mini production pattern a3. Then, the second main effect symbol a5 displayed in the third effect symbol display area of the main effect symbol display area A5, and the normal symbol displayed in the third normal symbol display area of the normal symbol mini symbol display area A3. The mini-figure effect pattern a3 has a common (same/similar) display mode (same "design (shape)" and "color (color scheme)" in this embodiment).
As described above, during the time-saving state (time-saving state 1, time-saving state 2, or time-saving state 3), the three second main effect symbols a5 displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5 are displayed in the general pattern mini The player can easily recognize that it corresponds to the three normal pattern mini effect patterns a3 displayed in the pattern display area A3.

Further, on the display screen 31a, it is possible to configure a pre-variation pending symbol display area B1 and a variable pending symbol display area B2 as display areas related to suspension.
When the normal state is occurring, the special figure 1 game information before the special figure hit determination (start determination) is executed (before the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started) in the pre-variation reserved symbol display area B1 is displayed. Also, when the normal state is occurring, in the variable pending design display area B2, after the special design hit determination (start determination) is executed (during the execution of the special symbol fluctuation display / stop display) Special figure game information A reserved design h corresponding to (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is displayed.
On the other hand, when the time-saving state (time-saving state 1, time-saving state 2, or time-saving state 3) is occurring, in the pre-variation pending design display area B1, before normal pattern hit-loss determination (start determination) is executed (normal design (Before the variable display of ) is started, the reserved pattern h corresponding to the general pattern game information is displayed. In addition, when the time saving state (time saving state 1, time saving state 2, or time saving state 3) is occurring, in the suspended design display area B2 during fluctuation, after the normal pattern hit-loss determination (start determination) is executed (normal pattern (during execution of variable display/stop display) is displayed.

As described above, during the occurrence of the normal state, mainly in the main effect symbol display area A5, in order to notify the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol or second special symbol) by the first main effect symbol a5. is executed, and a reserved design h corresponding to the first special design lottery (special figure 1 game information) is displayed in the reserved design display areas B1 and B2.
On the other hand, during the time-saving state (time-saving state 1, time-saving state 2, or time-saving state 3), the result of the normal design lottery is mainly displayed in the main production design display area A5 by the second main production design A5. An effect for notification is executed, and a reserved design h corresponding to a normal design lottery (general design game information) is displayed in the reserved design display areas B1 and B2.
Thereby, in the pachinko machine 1, during the occurrence of the normal state, the performance for notifying the result of the special symbol lottery is mainly executed, and the time saving state (time saving state 1, working time saving state 2 or working time saving state 3) is executed. During the occurrence of , an effect for informing the result of the normal symbol lottery is mainly executed.

The sub-image display device 32 is arranged on the front side of the main image display device 31 .
The sub-image display device 32 is composed of a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT display. The sub-image display device 32 has a display screen 32a capable of displaying effect images.
The sub-image display device 32 can be vertically displaced (moved) by a driving mechanism (not shown). Specifically, the sub-image display device 32 can be displaced within a predetermined range including an origin position (see FIG. 2) and an effect position (not shown) below the origin position. .
The sub image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the origin position is arranged above the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and does not cover the display screen 31a. On the other hand, the sub-image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the rendering position is arranged on the front side of the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and covers part of the display screen 31a.

A first starting port 51 is provided in the left path. The first starting port 51 is a ball-entering port (so-called “navel”) that opens upward, and is always capable of entering a game ball. The first starting port 51 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the right path).
In the first start port 51, a special figure 1 start port switch 101 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. The special figure 1 starting port switch 101 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball entered into the first starting port 51 (entering the game ball into the first starting port 51) Output. The main control board 200 executes the first special symbol lottery according to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 .

On the left side of the first starting opening 51 in the left path, there are provided an upper left other winning opening 57a, a middle left winning opening 57b, and a lower left winning opening 57c. Each of the other prize winning openings 57a to 57c is a ball entrance opening upward, and game balls can be entered at all times. The game balls flowing down the left path can be entered into each of the other winning holes 57a to 57c (the game balls flowing down the right path cannot be entered).
The game board 11 is provided with a left winning slot switch 106 (see FIG. 3). The left winning port switch 106 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the other winning ports 57a to 57c (entering the game ball to the other winning ports 57a to 57c). Output. The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the left winning hole switch 106 .

A large winning opening 55 is provided at the most upstream of the right path. The big winning hole 55 has a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) for a game ball to enter the big winning hole 55, and an open state that makes it possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the big winning hole 55. and a special electric accessory (special electric role) 55a that can be displaced.
The special electric accessory 55a is opened and closed by a special electric accessory solenoid 65 (see FIG. 3). The special electric accessory 55a is normally closed to the big winning port 55, making it impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball. In this case, the special electric accessory 55a is in an open state, and it becomes possible (easy) to enter the game ball. The big winning opening 55 allows entry of game balls flowing down the right path (impossibility of entry of game balls flowing down the left path).
A count switch 103 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the big winning opening 55 . The count switch 103 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the big winning hole 55 (entering the game ball into the big winning hole 55). The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the count switch 103 .
In addition, inside the big winning opening 55, there are a V area (not shown), a discharge area (not shown), and a game ball entering the big winning opening 55 can be placed in either the V area or the discharging area. A sorting means (not shown) for sorting to the area of is provided.
A V-region switch 110 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the V-region. The V area switch 110 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the V area (passage of the game ball through the V area). The main control board 200 sets "1" in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230, which will be described later, according to the input of the detection signal from the V area switch 110. FIG.
The distributing means is displaced between a V passing state in which the game balls entering the big winning opening 55 are distributed to the V area, and a non-V passing state in which the game balls entering the big winning opening 55 are distributed to the discharge area. It is possible to
That is, when the sorting means is displaced to the V passage state, the game ball entering the big winning hole 55 is sorted to the V area. As a result, it becomes impossible for a game ball that has entered the big winning hole 55 to pass through the discharge area.
On the other hand, when the sorting means is displaced to the non-V passing state, the game ball entering the big winning opening 55 is sorted to the discharge area. This makes it impossible for a game ball that has entered the big winning hole 55 to pass through the V area.
The diverting means is displaced by a V-region solenoid 66 (see FIG. 3).
A game ball entering the big winning hole 55 is first detected by the count switch 103, then sorted to either the V area or the discharge area by the sorting means, and after passing through the area , is discharged to the discharge path. At this time, the game balls distributed to the V area are detected by the V area switch 110 .

A second starting opening 52 is provided downstream of the big winning opening 55 in the right path. The second start port 52 has a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second start port 52, and a state that allows (easy) the entry of the game ball into the second start port 52. An ordinary electric accessory (ordinary electric role) 52a is provided which can be displaced to an open state to open the door.
The normal electric accessory 52a is opened and closed by a normal electric accessory solenoid 64 (see FIG. 3). In the second starting port 52, normally, the normal electric accessory 52a is in a closed state, and it is impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball, but when the normal per game state occurs. Then, the normal electric accessory 52a is opened, and the game ball can be entered. The second starting port 52 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
Inside the second starting port 52, a special figure 2 starting port switch 102 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. The special figure 2 starting port switch 102 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that entered the second starting port 52 (entering the game ball to the second starting port 52) Output. The main control board 200 executes the second special symbol lottery according to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 .

A starting gate 41 is provided downstream of the second starting port 52 in the right path. The starting gate 41 is formed so that game balls can always pass through it. The starting gate 41 allows passage of game balls flowing down the right path (impossibility of passage of game balls flowing down the left path).
The starting gate 41 is provided with a gate switch 104 (see FIG. 3). The gate switch 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the start gate 41 (passage of the start gate 41 by the game ball). The main control board 200 executes a normal symbol lottery according to the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 104 .
In addition, instead of the starting gate 41, an operation opening may be provided. The operating port is a ball-entering port (so-called “navel”) that opens upward, etc., and is configured so that game balls can be entered at all times. When providing an operating port, a gate switch 104 is provided within the operating port. The gate switch 104 is configured to output a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has entered the operating opening (game ball entering the operating opening). Then, the main control board 200 is configured to execute the normal symbol lottery according to the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 104 .

A right winning opening 56 is provided downstream of the starting gate 41 in the right path. The right other prize winning port 56 is a ball entrance opening upward, and game balls can be entered at all times. The right other prize winning port 56 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
A right prize winning port switch 105 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the right other prize winning port 56 . The right winning opening switch 105 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the other right winning opening 56 (entering the game ball into the other right winning opening 56). . The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the right winning opening switch 105 .

At the most downstream of the game area 30, an out port 58 is provided for discharging game balls that have not entered (won a prize) in any of the winning ports 51, 52, 55, 56, 57a to 57c.
Here, the inner frame unit 3 includes a discharge path (not shown) through which game balls discharged from the game area 30 pass. Specifically, the discharge path is attached to the back side of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3 . The pachinko machine 1 is configured such that all game balls hit into the game area 30 (all game balls discharged from the game area 30) pass through the discharge path. That is, the game ball launched into the game area 30 enters the game area 30 by entering any of the winning openings 51, 52, 55, 56, 57a to 57c, or by passing through the out opening 58. is discharged from and flows into the discharge channel.
Specifically, the game balls entering the winning holes 51, 52, 55, 56, 57a to 57c are detected by the switches 101, 102, 103, 105, 106, 110 provided in the winning holes. Later, it is guided to the discharge channel. Also, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 is guided to the discharge path.
The inner frame unit 3 is provided with an out switch 109 (see FIG. 3). Then, the out switch 109 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the discharge path (a game ball discharged from the game area 30). As a result, all game balls ejected from the game area 30 are detected by the out switch 109 .
Furthermore, in the game area 30, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged so as to guide the game balls to the respective prize winning openings 51, 52, 55, 56, 57a to 57c and the starting gate 41.

A main display device 60 is arranged on the game board 11 . The main display device 60 includes a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light-emitting element (LED in this embodiment).
Information about the game is displayed on the main display device 60 .
The main display device 60 includes a special figure 1 display device, a special figure 2 display device, a normal figure display device, a special figure 1 reservation display device, a special figure 2 reservation display device, a general figure reservation display device, and a round It is configured including a display device, a right-handed display device, a variable probability display device, and a time saving display device. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 holding display device and probability variation display device are not used.
Specifically, the main display device 60 includes 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32).
And, in the main display device 60, LED1 ~ LED8 constitutes a special figure 1 display device, LED7 ~ LED16 constitutes a special figure 2 display device, LED17, 18 constitutes a general figure display device, LED19 ~LED23 constitutes a round display device, LED24 constitutes a right-handed display device, LED25, 26 constitutes a special figure 1 pending display device, LEDs 27, 28 constitutes a special figure 2 pending display device Then, the LEDs 29 and 30 constitute a normal figure holding display device, the LED 31 constitutes a variable probability display device, and the LED 32 constitutes a time saving display device.

The special figure 1 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the first special symbol consisting of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, in the special figure 1 display device, the result of the first special symbol lottery is displayed by the stopped and displayed first special symbol.
The special figure 2 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the second special pattern consisting of numbers, patterns, and the like. Then, in the special figure 2 display device, the result of the second special symbol lottery is displayed by the stopped and displayed second special symbol.
Here, the display of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device and the display of the effect symbols a1 and a2 in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 4th symbol display area A2, the fluctuation display is started The time, the time when the variable display ends, the time when the stop display starts, and the lottery results indicated by the stopped symbols are associated with each other.
In addition, the display of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device and the display of the effect symbols a1 and a2 in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 4th symbol display area A2 are the timing when the fluctuation display is started. , the time when the variable display ends, the time when the stop display starts, and the lottery results indicated by the stopped symbols are associated with each other.
Then, when the first special symbol (stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device becomes a specific symbol (jackpot symbol), or the second special symbol stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device ( When the stop symbol) becomes a specific symbol (big win symbol), a big win game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is generated.
In addition, when the second special symbol (stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device becomes a specific symbol (small hit symbol), the small winning game state which is a game state advantageous to the player is changed. occur.
The normal pattern display device can perform variable display and stop display of normal patterns consisting of numbers, patterns, and the like. Then, in the normal pattern display device, the results of the normal pattern lottery are displayed by the stopped normal symbols.
Here, the display of the normal symbols in the normal pattern display device and the display of the production patterns a4 and a5 in the normal pattern mini symbol display area A4 and the normal pattern 4th pattern display area A5 are the time when the fluctuation display is started, the fluctuation The time when the display ends, the time when the stop display starts, and the lottery results indicated by the symbols stopped and displayed are associated with each other.
Then, when the normal pattern stop-displayed on the normal pattern display device becomes a specific pattern (normal pattern per pattern), the normal pattern per game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is generated.

The special figure 1 reservation display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is withheld (the number of special figure 1 reservations).
As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 holding display device is not used.
The normal pattern lottery holding display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery is held (the number of normal pattern holdings).
The round display device displays the number of round games executed during the jackpot game state (type of jackpot game state).
The right-handed display device displays the path (left-handed path or right-handed path) for hitting the game ball.
As described above, the variable probability display device is not used in this embodiment.
The current game state (executing or stopping the time saving control) is displayed on the time saving display device.

Also, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with one or a plurality of movable units (not shown). In this embodiment, the front frame unit 4 is provided with one or more movable units, and the game board unit 10 is provided with one or more movable units.
Each movable body unit of the front frame unit 4 is arranged on the front surface of the decoration part 4b, the upper surface of the receiving plate unit 5, etc., and is capable of performing a predetermined performance operation.
Each movable unit of the game board unit 10 is attached to the front side of the set board. Specifically, each movable body unit is disposed in a space (hereinafter referred to as “effect space”) between the game board 11 and the main image display device 31 (display screen 31a). Each movable body unit can perform a predetermined performance action in the performance space.
Each movable body unit includes an effect member, a drive mechanism, a drive source, and a position detection sensor 26 (see FIG. 3). In this embodiment, a motor 23 (see FIG. 3) is used as a drive source. The motor 23 is a stepping motor. Note that a configuration using a solenoid as a driving source may be employed.
The effect member can be displaced along a predetermined direction by a drive mechanism. Specifically, the effect member can be displaced to a plurality of positions including an initial position and a effect position. The effect member is driven (displaced) by a motor 23 .

The position detection sensor 26 is configured by a photosensor or the like. A position detection sensor 26 detects the position of the production member. Specifically, the position detection sensor 26 includes a light projecting section and a light receiving section that receives light projected from the light projecting section. Then, the position detection sensor 26 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 in accordance with the reception (detection) of the light projected from the light projecting section by the light receiving section. On the other hand, the position detection sensor 26 stops outputting the detection signal to the performance control board 300 when the light receiving section does not receive (detect) the light projected from the light projecting section.
A shield plate is provided at a predetermined position of the effect member. Then, when the effect member is arranged at the initial position, the shielding plate is arranged between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the position detection sensor 26 to block light from entering the light receiving portion. Thereby, when the production member is arranged at the initial position, the output of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 26 to the production control board 300 is stopped. On the other hand, when the production member is not arranged at the initial position, a detection signal is output from the position detection sensor 26 to the production control board 300 .
Thereby, the effect control board 300 can detect whether or not the effect member is arranged at the initial position depending on the input state of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 26 .

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with detection sensors for detecting various abnormal states.
In this embodiment, the detection sensors include a glass frame opening sensor 107 (see FIG. 3), an inner frame opening sensor 108 (see FIG. 3), a vibration detection sensor 113 (see FIG. 3), and a radio wave detection sensor 114 (see FIG. 3). , a magnetic detection sensor 115 (see FIG. 3) and the like are provided.
The glass frame opening sensor 107 detects opening of the front frame unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3 . Then, the glass frame opening sensor 107 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 according to the opening of the front frame unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3 .
The inner frame open sensor 108 detects opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2 . Then, the inner frame opening sensor 108 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 according to the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2 .
The vibration detection sensor 113 detects vibration of the game board 11 . In this embodiment, the vibration detection sensor 113 is arranged on the game board 11 . Then, the vibration detection sensor 113 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of vibration of the game board 11 .
The radio wave detection sensor 114 detects radio waves generated around the game board 11 . In this embodiment, two radio wave detection sensors 114 are arranged on the game board 11 . Each radio wave detection sensor 114 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of radio waves.
The magnetism detection sensor 115 detects magnetism generated around the game board 11 . In this embodiment, three magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged. Specifically, one magnetic detection sensor 115 is arranged in the inner frame unit 3 (discharge path). Also, two magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged on the game board 11 . Then, the magnetic detection sensor 115 arranged in the inner frame unit 3 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to detection of magnetism. Further, each magnetic detection sensor 115 arranged on the game board 11 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in accordance with detection of magnetism.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachinko machine.
The pachinko machine 1 includes various control boards.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 1 supplies power (electric power) to the main control board 200, the performance control board 300, the payout control board 400, and the control boards 200, 300, 400, etc. It has a plurality of control boards such as a power supply board 600, a driver board 310, a sub-connection board 320, and the like.
The plurality of control boards 200, 300, 400, 600 are independent (separate) circuit boards. Further, each control board 200, 300, 400, 600 is accommodated in a separate board case (main board case 250, etc., which will be described later).
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are included in the game board unit 10 . Specifically, the main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 are attached to the back side of the game board 11 .
The payout control board 400 is included in the inner frame unit 3 . Specifically, the payout control board 400 is attached to the back side of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3 .

(Configuration of main control board 200)
First, the configuration of the main control board 200 will be described.
The main control board 200 controls the progress of the game.
The main control board 200 includes a one-chip microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer), a clock generation circuit 202, a random number generation circuit 203, an input port 204, an output port 205, a performance display device 206, a RAM clear switch 207, a setting key switch 208, and a sink. It includes a driver 240, source drivers 250a and 250b, and the like.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI integrated with a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, and the like.

The main control board 200 includes a memory area used by the CPU 210 . The memory area used by the CPU 210 includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 220 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 230 .
The ROM 220 (memory area of the ROM 220) includes a used area m1 (0000H to 1A7AH) and an unused area m2 (2000H to 2BFFH).
The used area m1 includes a program area, an unused area, and a data area. The program area stores a program (program code) for controlling the progress of the game. The data area stores data (program data) for controlling the progress of the game. Note that the used area m1 may be configured without an unused area.
The unused area m2 includes a program area and a data area.
The program area includes a program (program code) for executing processing related to the test defined by the game machine regulations, and a program (program code) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 (specifically, calculating the base ratio). code) and are stored. The data area stores data (program data) for executing processing related to tests defined by gaming machine regulations and data (program data) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 .
The ROM 220 also has an unused area, a ROM comment area, a program management area, etc., in addition to the used area m1 and the non-used area m2.
Arbitrary data such as program titles and versions are stored in the ROM comment area. On the other hand, the program management area stores information necessary for the CPU 210 to execute various programs.
Further, in the ROM 220, an unused area m3 of predetermined bytes (for example, 16 bytes or more) is provided between the used area m1 and the unused area m2. This clarifies the boundary between the use area m1 and the non-use area m2.

The RAM 230 (memory area of the RAM 230) includes a used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) and an unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH).
The use area M1 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. Note that the used area M1 may be configured without including an unused area.
Specifically, the work area includes a set value area, a gaming machine status flag area, a checksum area, a backup flag area, an error related area, a normal game related area 1, and a normal game related area 2. is composed of
A setting value is stored in the setting value area. A gaming machine status flag is stored in the gaming machine status flag area. A checksum is stored in the checksum area. A backup flag is stored in the backup flag area. Information about errors is stored in the error-related area. The normal game-related area 1 stores a sub-command pointer and the like. The normal game-related area 2 stores input/output data in the main control board 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), lottery results, flags for managing the game state, and the like. In particular, the normal game-related area 2 is a special figure 1 starter switch 101, a special figure 2 starter switch 102, and a region for storing game information acquired with the input of a detection signal from each of the gate switch 104 (Game information storage area described later), a special figure 1 display pattern counter, a special figure 2 display pattern counter, a normal figure display pattern counter and the like are included.
The unused area M2 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests defined by game machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). It is used as an area for temporarily storing various data. On the other hand, the stack area is during execution of a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests defined by gaming machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). In addition, it is used as an area to temporarily save various data.
Specifically, the work area includes a performance display related area. The performance display related area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during the execution of the program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. FIG.
In addition, the RAM 230 is provided with an unused area M3 of predetermined bytes (16 bytes or more) between the used area M1 and the unused area M2. This clarifies the boundary between the use area M1 and the non-use area M2.

In this embodiment, it is permitted to refer to the data stored in the non-use area M2 in the process based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1.
On the other hand, it is prohibited to rewrite (change) the data stored in the non-use area M2 by processing based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. there is
Also, in the process based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (the program for executing the process related to the test defined by the game machine regulations, or the program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), the use area It is permitted to refer to the data stored in M1.
On the other hand, by processing based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to the test specified by the game machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), the use area The data stored in M1 is prohibited from being rewritten (changed).
A game in the pachinko machine 1 can be progressed (completed) by a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1.

The clock generation circuit 202 generates a clock (synchronization signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 [MHz] in this embodiment) and outputs this clock to the CPU 210 and the random number generation circuit 203 respectively.
A random number generating circuit 203 includes a first loop counter for generating a winning random number for the normal symbol lottery, a second loop counter for generating a big winning random number for the first special symbol lottery, and a second loop counter for generating a big winning random number for the second special symbol lottery. It comprises a 3rd loop counter and a 4th loop counter that generates a reach group random number.
The first loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A winning random number for a normal pattern lottery is generated. In this embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).
The second loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery is generated. In this embodiment, the value of the second loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).

The third loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery is generated. In this embodiment, the value of the third loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).
The fourth loop counter keeps the value of the loop counter within a predetermined range (0 to 10006 in this embodiment) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (once at the clock frequency divided by 32). within range) to generate a reach group random number. In this embodiment, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated every 2.666 [μs] (32 [s]/12 [MHz]=2.666 [μs]).

The input port 204 includes a plurality of input ports (input port 0 to input port 3 in this embodiment).
Input port 0 receives a detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor 107, a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108, a detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 113, a detection signal from one of the radio wave detection sensors 114, and a magnetic detection sensor 115. A detection signal or the like from is input.
Input port 1 receives a RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from the setting key switch 208, and the like.
The input port 2 receives a detection signal from the count switch 103, a detection signal from the right winning slot switch 105, a detection signal from the left winning slot switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, and a signal from the radio wave detection sensor 114 on the other side. A detection signal or the like is input.
To the input port 3, the detection signal from the special figure 1 starter switch 101, the detection signal from the special figure 2 starter switch 102, the detection signal from the gate switch 104, the detection signal from the V area switch 110, etc. are input. be.
Each input port (input port 0 to input port 3) is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor (detection signal). In the reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor, 1-bit data indicating the reception state of the detection signal from the switch/sensor is set.
Specifically, in the reception storage area corresponding to each switch sensor, "1" is set when the detection signal from the switch sensor is input (high level). "0" is set when the detection signal from is not input (low level).

The output port 205 includes a plurality of output ports (output port 0 to output port 4 in this embodiment).
The output port 0 outputs data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the main display device 60 . A data signal output from the output port 0 is input to the source driver 250a.
The output port 1 outputs common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) for controlling lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206 . A common signal output from the output port 1 is input to the sink driver 240 .
Output port 2 outputs an external signal. At this time, the external signal output from the output port 2 is input to the hall computer via the payout control board 400 and the external terminal board 450 .
The output port 3 outputs a control signal for controlling the drive of the normal electric accessory solenoid 64, a control signal for controlling the drive of the special electric accessory solenoid 65, a control signal for controlling the V-region solenoid 66, etc. Output.
The output port 4 outputs data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the performance display device 206 . A data signal output from the output port 4 is input to the source driver 250b.

Also, the main control board 200 is configured to include a command output port 1 and a command output port 2 . Then, the CPU 210 transmits a control command (subcommand) to the performance control board 300 from the command output port 1, and transmits a control command (payout command) to the payout control board 400 from the command output port 2. do.
Command output port 1 and command output port 2 each include a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), a transmission shift register (not shown), have.
The transmission data register outputs the control command input based on the subcommand transmission processing (step S2-4), which will be described later, to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is composed of multiple registers and is capable of storing multiple control commands. The FIFO buffer stores the control commands input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control commands to the transmission shift register in the input order.
The transmission shift register performs parallel-serial conversion on the control command input from the FIFO buffer, and transmits it to the effect control board 300 or the payout control board 400 as serial data.

Performance display device 206 includes a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light-emitting element (LED in this embodiment). It should be noted that the performance display device 206 is arranged on the back side of the game board 11, so that it cannot be visually recognized by the player.
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the state of the game machine (hereinafter referred to as "game machine state") includes a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting error state, and a RAM error state. and a backup abnormal state are defined. The information displayed on the performance display device 206 changes according to the gaming machine state that has occurred.

The performance display device 206 includes four (four-digit) display units (not shown). Each display section is composed of eight lighting elements. That is, each display unit is composed of a 7-segment LED capable of displaying numbers, symbols, etc., and a dot-segment LED capable of displaying dots such as a decimal point.
Specifically, the performance display device 206 includes 32 lighting elements (LED33 to LED64). In the performance display device 206, LED33 to LED40 are the first digit display portion, LED41 to LED48 are the second digit display portion, LED49 to LED56 are the third digit display portion, and LED57 to LED64. is the fourth digit display.

The game can be played while the playable state is being generated. Then, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 while the playable state is occurring.
In this embodiment, while the playable state is occurring, the performance display device 206 changes the first base ratio and the second base ratio every predetermined time (5.0 [s] in this embodiment). , are displayed alternately.
The “first base ratio” is the base ratio of the current section (the base ratio calculated for the period from the start of the current section to the current time).
The “second base ratio” is the base ratio of the previous section (the final base ratio calculated for the previous section).
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information for identifying the type of base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio) is displayed by the upper two-digit display portion of the four-digit display portion. A number indicating the base ratio (percentage) is displayed by the lower two digits of the display.

While the setting change state is occurring, the setting value can be changed. While the setting change state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information indicating that the setting change state is occurring is displayed by the display portion of the upper three digits of the display portion of the four digits (specifically, ""n." is displayed in the upper two digits, and "-" is displayed in the upper third digit. be done.
While the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting value can be confirmed. While the setting confirmation state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring is displayed by the display section of the upper three digits of the display section of four digits (specifically, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring (specifically, ""r" is displayed in the upper two digits, and "n." be.

The game cannot progress while the game stop state (setting error state, RAM error state, and backup error state) is occurring. Then, while the game stop state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information indicating that the game stop state is occurring by the display portion of the upper three digits of the display portion of the four digits (specifically, information indicating that the game stop state is occurring (specifically, ""E" is displayed in the upper two digits, "r." A number indicating the error code corresponding to the status) is displayed.

The RAM clear switch 207 is a tactile switch. In other words, the RAM clear switch 207 includes an operation unit that can be pressed. The RAM clear switch 207 outputs a RAM clear signal to the input port 1 when the operation unit is pressed.
The setting key switch 208 is a key lock switch. In other words, the setting key switch 208 includes an operation section provided with a keyhole. The operation unit is unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole, and can be rotated (switched) from the OFF state to the ON state. The setting key switch 208 outputs a detection signal to the input port 1 when the operation unit is in the ON state.

The sink driver 240 controls the output of common signals to the respective display devices 60 and 206 according to the common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) output from the output port 1. FIG.
The source driver 250a controls the output of data signals to the main display device 60 according to the data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 0. FIG.
The source driver 250b controls the output of data signals to the performance display device 206 according to the data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 4. FIG.
Thus, the source driver 250a and the sink driver 240 control the lighting of the lighting elements (LED1 to LED32) included in the main display device 60. FIG.
Also, the source driver 250b and the sink driver 240 control the lighting of the lighting elements (LED33 to LED64) included in the performance display device 206. FIG.

The main control board 200 also includes a test signal output circuit (not shown).
The CPU 210 indicates an internal state (jackpot game state, game state (normal state, time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3), left-handed period, right-handed period, etc.) in the test signal output process (step S4-24) described later. It generates test information (test signal) and stores the generated test signal in the port output request buffer of RAM 230 . As a result, the test signal stored in the port output request buffer is output from the predetermined output port. A test signal output from a predetermined output port is input to an interface board of a test computer (not shown) via a test signal output circuit.
Also, in the main control board 200, the detection signal from the special figure 1 starter switch 101, the detection signal from the special figure 2 starter switch 102, the detection signal from the gate switch 104, the detection signal from the count switch 103, the right prize A detection signal from the opening switch 105, a detection signal from the left winning opening switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, etc. are input to the input port 204, and sent to the computer for testing via the test signal output circuit. Input to the interface board.
Furthermore, in the main control board 200, a control signal for controlling the driving of each solenoid (ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64, special electric accessory solenoid 65, V area solenoid 66, etc.) output from the output port 3 is It is input to the solenoids 64, 65, 66 and to the interface board of the computer for testing via the test signal output circuit.

(Configuration of payout control board 400)
Next, the configuration of the payout control board 400 will be described.
The payout control board 400 controls the shooting of game balls to the game area 30 and the payout of game balls.
The payout control board 400 includes a one-chip microcomputer.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI integrated with a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like. Specifically, a one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like.
The payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation by the game ball payout device 440 based on the control command received from the main control board 200 and the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit.
Also, the payout control board 400 controls the game ball shooting operation of the game ball shooting device 430 based on the detection signal input from the shooting volume 410 . Specifically, the shooting operation of the game ball by the game ball shooting device 430 is controlled so that the game ball is shot to the game area 30 with the intensity corresponding to the detection signal input from the shooting volume 410 .

(Configuration of production control board 300)
Next, the configuration of the effect control board 300 will be described.
The production control board 300 controls production.
The production control board 300 is configured including a one-chip microcomputer.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI integrated with a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a VDP, a sound processor, an illumination controller, a motor controller, and the like.
Based on the control command received from the main control board 200, the effect control board 300 displays the effect images on the various image display devices 31 and 32, turns on the various lamps 20 and 21, outputs sounds from the various speakers 22, and performs various movements. It controls the driving of the motor 23 that drives the body unit.

The ROM of the effect control board 300 stores a program relating to the progress of the effect, data necessary for the progress of the effect, and the like.
The RAM of the effect control board 300 temporarily stores control commands received from the main control board 200, data for arithmetic processing, and the like.
The CPU of the effect control board 300 determines the effect contents to be executed based on the control command received from the main control board 200, and sets the effect program (effect control table) corresponding to the determined effect contents.
The VDP generates display control data (display control signal) according to an effect program (effect control table) set by the CPU, and outputs the generated display control data to various image display devices 31 and 32 .
The sound processor generates sound control data (sound control signal) according to a performance program (performance control table) set by the CPU, and sends the generated sound control data to a digital audio power amplifier (not shown). Output. Then, the digital audio power amplifier generates control signals corresponding to the various speakers 22 based on the sound control data input from the sound processor, and transmits the generated control signals to the various speakers 22 via the sub connection board 320. Output for
The lighting controller generates lamp control data (lamp control signal) according to a production program (production control table) set by the CPU, and sends the generated lamp control data to the driver board 310 and the sub-connection board 320 respectively. Output for
The motor controller generates motor control data (motor control signal) according to an effect program (effect control table) set by the CPU, and sends the generated motor control data to each of the driver board 310 and the sub-connection board 320. output.

The driver board 310 includes a motor driver (not shown) and a lamp driver (not shown).
The motor control data output from the performance control board 300 is input to the motor driver. Then, according to the motor control data input from the effect control board 300, the motor driver provides an excitation signal (drive current) output.
The lamp control data output from the effect control board 300 is input to the lamp driver. Then, the lamp driver controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element group of each system that constitutes the board surface lamp 21 according to the lamp control data input from the effect control board 300 .
The sub connection board 320 includes a motor driver (not shown) and a lamp driver (not shown).
The motor control data output from the performance control board 300 is input to the motor driver. Then, according to the motor control data input from the performance control board 300, the motor driver provides an excitation signal (drive current) output.
The lamp control data output from the effect control board 300 is input to the lamp driver. Then, the lamp driver controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element group of each system that constitutes the frame lamp 20 according to the lamp control data input from the effect control board 300 .

(Regarding gaming machine status)
In the pachinko machine 1, six states (specifically, playable state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, setting error state, RAM error state, and backup error state) are defined as gaming machine states. .
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a gaming machine state flag area. In the gaming machine status flag area, six gaming machine statuses (specifically, playable status, setting change status, setting confirmation status, setting error status, RAM error status, and backup error status) are displayed as gaming machine status flags. ), a value corresponding to any one gaming machine state is stored (set). Then, in the pachinko machine 1, a gaming machine state corresponding to the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is generated.
The "playable state" is a gaming machine state in which a game can be played.
Execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is permitted while the game-enabled state is occurring. As a result, the game (regular game and special game) can be progressed.
Also, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 while the playable state is occurring. In addition, information about the game is displayed on the main display device 60 .

The “setting change state” is a game machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 can be changed.
The configuration change state occurs when the configuration change condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection from the RAM clear switch 207 The setting change condition is established when the signal is input. That is, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the setting change state occurs. be done.
While the setting change state is occurring, execution of the processing of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Also, while the setting change state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored in the setting value area. Also, all the lighting elements forming the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
Furthermore, by pressing the RAM clear switch 207 while the setting change state is occurring, the setting value stored in the setting value area can be changed. When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is being generated, the game ready state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the set value stored in the set value area is determined.

The “setting confirmation state” is a game machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 can be confirmed.
The set-verify state occurs when the set-verify condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection from the RAM clear switch 207 The setting confirmation condition is met when no signal is input. That is, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is not pressed, the setting confirmation state occurs. be done.
Execution of the processing of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the setting confirmation state is occurring. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Also, while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored in the setting value area. This makes it possible to confirm the set value stored in the set value area. Also, all the lighting elements forming the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
Note that the set values stored in the set value area cannot be changed while the setting confirmation state is occurring.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting confirmation state is being generated, the game ready state is generated instead of the setting confirmation state.

The "setting error state" is a gaming machine state in which a setting error has occurred.
The abnormal setting state is generated when it is determined that the set value set in the set value area is not within the specified range while the playable state is being generated.
Execution of the processing of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the setting error state is occurring. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Further, while the abnormal setting state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code designating the occurrence of the abnormal setting. Also, all the lighting elements that constitute the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the setting error state, it is necessary to execute power shutdown and power on to cause a setting change state.

"RAM abnormal state" is a gaming machine state in which a RAM abnormality occurs.
The RAM abnormal state occurs when it is determined that a read/write abnormality has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
Execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the RAM abnormal state is occurring. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Further, while the RAM abnormality state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code designating the occurrence of the RAM abnormality. Also, all the lighting elements forming the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the RAM abnormal state, it is necessary to execute power shutdown and power on to cause the setting change state.

The “backup abnormality state” is a gaming machine state in which a backup abnormality has occurred.
The backup abnormality state is generated when it is determined that a backup abnormality of the RAM 230 (specifically, a backup flag abnormality or a checksum abnormality) has occurred when the power is turned on.
Execution of the processing of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the backup abnormal state is occurring. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Further, while the backup abnormality is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code designating the occurrence of the backup abnormality. Also, all the lighting elements that constitute the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the backup abnormal state, it is necessary to execute power shutdown and power on to cause a setting change state.

(About setting value)
Next, setting values (setting information) set in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The "set value" is information that designates the winning probability of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery). In this embodiment, values from "0" to "5" are defined as the set values.
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a set value area. Any one of "0" to "5" is stored (set) in the setting value area as the setting value. Then, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is determined according to the value set in the set value area.
In this embodiment, the probability of winning the "jackpot" by the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery) changes according to the value set in the set value area.
The probability of winning the special symbol lottery corresponding to each setting value (probability of winning the "jackpot") is set to the winning probability corresponding to the setting value = "5" and the setting value = "4" in order from the highest winning probability. Winning probability corresponding to setting value = "3" Winning probability corresponding to setting value = "2" Winning probability corresponding to setting value = "1" Winning probability corresponding to setting value = "0" Winning probability (winning probability "high" → winning probability "low").

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the set value stored in the set value area is fixed at "3" and cannot be changed to another value. It should be noted that the setting value stored in the setting value area may be changed (selected) while the setting change state is occurring. Here, the change of the setting value is executed by the administrator of the pachinko machine 1 (such as an employee of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed).
That is, as described above, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is opened, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the setting A modified state is raised.
While the setting change state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored in the setting value area. Further, each time the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the set value stored in the set value area is changed. At this time, when the setting value set in the setting value area is changed, the setting value displayed on the performance display device 206 is also changed accordingly.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is being generated, the game ready state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the set value stored in the set value area is determined.

(About base ratio)
In the pachinko machine 1, the base ratio (base value) is calculated by the CPU 210 while the playable state is occurring. In this embodiment, the base ratio is calculated only during the occurrence of a predetermined game state (specifically, during the occurrence of the special figure low probability state and during the stop of the time saving control).
Then, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 while the playable state is occurring.
The "base ratio" is the number of game balls launched into the game area 30, and the number of game balls to a predetermined ball entrance (in this embodiment, the start openings 51, 52 and other winning openings 56, 57a to 57c). The information is calculated based on the number of prize balls paid out according to the number of incoming balls. Specifically, the base ratio is the ratio (percentage) of the number of payouts (the number of paid out prize balls) to the number of out balls (the number of game balls that have been hit).
In the present embodiment, the base ratio is calculated for each predetermined section (period). As the predetermined section, a section in which a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 60000 [balls]) of out balls is detected (discharged) is defined. That is, each section starts when the previous section ends, and ends when the number of out-balls detected during the current section reaches a predetermined number (60000 [balls]). Then, the CPU 210 calculates the base ratio at any time (in real time) during each interval.
It should be noted that a predetermined period of time may be defined as the predetermined interval. That is, the CPU 210 may be configured to calculate the base ratio for each predetermined time.
"Number of out balls" refers to the number of out balls. “Out ball” refers to a game ball ejected from the game area 30 . Specifically, the out ball is a game ball that has passed through the discharge path (a game ball detected by the out switch 109).
In addition, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 may be used as an out ball. Specifically, the out switch 109 may be configured to detect only the game ball discharged from the out port 58, and the game ball detected by the out switch 109 may be the out ball.
The "number of payouts" refers to the total number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of game balls into the starting ports 51, 52 and the other winning ports 56, 57a-57c.

(About game state)
Next, game states defined by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2, and time-saving control 3 as auxiliary controls that are advantageous to the player. In the following description, the game state in which the time saving control 1 is stopped, the time saving control 2 is stopped, and the time saving control 3 is stopped is called a "normal state". In addition, the game state during execution of the time saving control 1 is defined as "time saving state (easy winning state) 1". Also, the game state during execution of the time saving control 2 is defined as "time saving state (easy win state) 2". Also, the game state during execution of the time saving control 3 is defined as "time saving state (easy winning state) 3".
During execution of time saving control (time saving control 1 to time saving control 3) (during time saving state 1 to time saving state 3 occurring), time saving control (time saving control 1 to time saving control 3) is stopped (during normal state) Compared with , in the game state per normal figure to be described later, it becomes easier to enter the game ball into the second start port 52 .
Also, during the execution of time reduction control 1 (during the occurrence of time reduction state 1), compared to the execution of time reduction control 2 and time reduction control 3 (during the occurrence of time reduction state 2 and the occurrence of time reduction control 3), normal In the game state per figure, it becomes easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52.例文帳に追加
In this embodiment, during the execution of the time saving control 2 (during the occurrence of the time saving state 2) and during the execution of the time saving control 3 (during the occurrence of the time saving state 3), to the second start port 52 in the game state per normal figure The ease of entry of the game ball is the same. In addition, during execution of the time saving control 3 (during the occurrence of the time saving state 3) than during the execution of the time saving control 2 (during the occurrence of the time saving state 2), the normal figure fluctuation time (average) is longer.
Specifically, during the execution of time saving control (time saving control 1 to time saving control 3) (while time saving state 1 to time saving state 3 is occurring), time saving control (time saving control 1 to time saving control 3) is stopped (normal state is occurring), in the case of winning the "normal pattern winning" by the normal symbol lottery, the probability that the "long opening pattern", which will be described later, is selected as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a is high. there is In other words, during the execution of time saving control (time saving control 1 to time saving control 3) (during the occurrence of time saving state 1 to time saving state 3), the time saving control (time saving control 1 to time saving control 3) is stopped (normal state Occurring), the probability of winning the "long open pattern" based on the normal pattern lottery is high.
Also, during the time saving control 1 (during the time saving state 1 occurring), compared to the time saving control 2/time saving control 3 being performed (during the time saving state 2 occurring/time saving control 3 occurring), normal In the case of winning the "general figure hit" by the pattern lottery, the probability that the "long opening pattern" is selected as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessary 52a is high. In other words, during the execution of the time saving control 1 (during the occurrence of the time saving state 1), compared with the execution of the time saving control 2 and the time saving control 3 (during the occurrence of the time saving state 2 and the time saving control 3), The probability of winning the "long open pattern" based on the normal pattern lottery is high.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the time saving control 2 (during the occurrence of the time saving state 2) and during the execution of the time saving control 3 (during the occurrence of the time saving state 3), the normal pattern lottery will When winning, the probability of selecting the "long opening pattern" as the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is the same. In other words, during the execution of the time saving control 2 (during the occurrence of the time saving state 2) and during the execution of the time saving control 3 (during the occurrence of the time saving state 3), the "long open pattern" is elected based on the normal symbol lottery. the probabilities are the same.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the "normal pattern" by the normal symbol lottery does not change according to the game state. That is, regarding the probability of winning the "normal figure per" by normal pattern lottery, time saving control (time saving control 1 to time saving control 3) is being executed (time saving state 1 to time saving state 3 occurring) and time saving control (time saving control 1 to time saving control 3) during stop (during occurrence of normal state) is the same. In addition, regarding the probability of winning the "normal pattern" by the normal pattern lottery, the time reduction control 1 is being executed (time reduction state 1 is occurring), the time reduction control 2 is being executed (time reduction state 2 is occurring), and the time reduction It is the same as during execution of control 3 (during occurrence of time saving state 3).
Further, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a "big win" or "small win" by the special symbol lottery does not change according to the game state.

(Regarding various lotteries)
Next, various lotteries executed by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 4 is a diagram showing winning probabilities of various lotteries. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing winning types of the normal symbol lottery. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing winning types of the special symbol lottery.
In addition, FIG. 4(a) shows the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery, FIG. 4(b) shows the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery, and FIG. 4(c) shows the winning probability of the second special symbol lottery. indicates probability. In addition, FIG. 5 shows the winning type (type of "normal pattern per pattern") selected when "normal per pattern" is won by normal pattern lottery. Furthermore, FIG. 6(a) shows the winning type (type of "big hit design") selected when the "big hit" is won by the first special design lottery, and FIG. 6(b) shows the second special design. Fig. 6(c) shows the winning type (type of "big hit pattern") selected when the "big hit" is won by lottery, and Fig. 6(c) is selected when the "small hit" is won by the second special pattern lottery. It shows the winning type (type of "small hit pattern").

In the pachinko machine 1, a normal symbol lottery is executed when a game ball passes through a starting gate 41.例文帳に追加
In this embodiment, only "per normal pattern" is defined as a result of the normal symbol lottery. It should be noted that, as a result of the normal symbol lottery, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which "per normal pattern" and "lost" are stipulated.
As shown in FIG. 4(a), in the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern hit/loss determination), the probability of winning the "normal pattern hit" is 1/1. In this embodiment, the probability of winning the "normal pattern" by the normal symbol lottery does not change according to the game state. In addition, due to the normal pattern lottery that is executed during the occurrence of the time-saving state (time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3), rather than the probability of winning the "normal pattern lottery" by the normal pattern lottery that is executed during the occurrence of the normal state, " A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning the "per normal pattern" is higher.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the pachinko machine 1, as the winning type (type of "normal pattern winning pattern") selected when "normal pattern winning" is won by the normal symbol lottery, "normal pattern winning pattern 1" is selected. , "Universal pattern 2" and "Universal pattern 3" are defined.
In the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern stop design judgment), if you win the "normal pattern per pattern", the probability of winning the "normal pattern per pattern 1" is 65000/65536, and the "normal pattern per pattern 2" is won. The probability is 156/65536, and the probability of winning the "symbol 3 per normal pattern" is 380/65536.
When the "normal pattern per pattern 1" is won, the stop pattern corresponding to the normal pattern "normal per pattern 1" is stop-displayed in the general pattern display device. In particular, when winning the "normal pattern per pattern 1" based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, in the general pattern mini symbol display area A3 and the general pattern 4th symbol display area A4, "lost pattern ” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the "normal pattern per pattern 1" is elected based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1, in the general pattern mini symbol display area A3 and the general pattern 4th symbol display area A4, "hit The stop symbol corresponding to the "symbol" is stop-displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the "win symbol" is stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when winning the "normal pattern per pattern 1" based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 2 or the time saving state 3, the general pattern mini pattern display area A3 and the general pattern 4th pattern display area A4 , the stop symbol corresponding to the "missing symbol" is stop-displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the "losing symbol" is stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5.

Here, the "missing pattern" stop-displayed in the general-design mini-symbol display area A3 and the general-design fourth design display area A4 is, for example, stop-displayed in the three general-design mini-design display areas A3. The number (identification information) indicated by the general mini effect pattern a3, such as "1, 6, 9", which is stopped and displayed in at least one general pattern display area, is displayed in another general pattern display The combination is different from the number (identification information) indicated by the normal-figure mini effect pattern a3 stopped and displayed in the area, and the normal-figure 4th effect pattern a4 stop-displayed in the normal-figure 4th pattern display area A4 is "x". shall be displayed.
On the other hand, the "hit pattern" stop-displayed in the general mini-symbol display area A3 and the 4th general-design symbol display area A4 is, for example, stopped in the three general-design mini-symbol display areas A3. The general pattern mini production pattern a3 is aligned with the general pattern mini production pattern a3 indicating the same number (identification information) such as "1, 1, 1", and the general pattern stopped and displayed in the general pattern 4th pattern display area A4. The display mode is such that the fourth effect pattern a4 in the figure shows "O".
In addition, the "missing symbols" stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5 are, for example, three main effect symbols a5 stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas, such as "1, 6, 9". A display in which the number (identification information) indicated by the main effect symbol a5 stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area is combined differently from the number (identification information) indicated by the main effect symbol a5 stopped and displayed in the other effect symbol display areas. mode.
On the other hand, the "win symbols" stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5 are, for example, three main effect symbols a5 stopped and displayed in the three effect symbol display areas having the same number such as "1, 1, 1". The display mode is such that the combination of the main effect symbols a5 indicating (identification information) is aligned.

When the "normal pattern winning pattern 2" is won, the stop pattern corresponding to the normal pattern "normal pattern winning pattern 2" is stop-displayed in the normal pattern display device. In particular, when winning the "normal pattern per pattern 2" based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, in the general pattern mini symbol display area A3 and the general pattern 4th symbol display area A4, "lost pattern ” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the "normal pattern per pattern 2" is elected based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1, in the general pattern mini symbol display area A3 and the general pattern 4th symbol display area A4, "hit The stop symbol corresponding to the "symbol" is stop-displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the "win symbol" is stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when winning the "normal pattern per pattern 2" based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 2 or the time saving state 3, the normal pattern mini pattern display area A3 and the general pattern 4th pattern display area A4 , the stop symbol corresponding to the "missing symbol" is stop-displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the "losing symbol" is stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5.
When the "normal pattern winning pattern 3" is won, the stop pattern corresponding to the normal pattern "normal pattern winning pattern 3" is stop-displayed in the normal pattern display device. In particular, when winning the "normal pattern per pattern 3" based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, in the general pattern mini symbol display area A3 and the general pattern 4th symbol display area A4, "lost pattern ” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when winning the "normal pattern per pattern 3" based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3, the general pattern mini pattern display area A3 and the general pattern 4th pattern display area A4 , the stop symbol corresponding to the "win symbol" is stop-displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the "win symbol" is stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5.

In the case of winning the "general figure per pattern"("universal per pattern 1" to "universal per pattern 3"), the general per pattern game state is generated. In the normal game state, the normal electric accessory 52a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the second start port 52 (easily).
In this embodiment, "short open pattern" and "long open pattern" are defined as the types of open patterns (open mode/open/close mode) of the normal electric accessary product 52a during the occurrence of the normal per game state. ing.
"Short opening pattern" is an opening pattern (opening mode/opening/closing mode) that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 during the normal game state. In the "short open pattern", compared to the "long open pattern", the time during which the normal electric accessory 52a is in the open state during the normal per game state is shorter. Specifically, in the "short opening pattern", the number of times the normal electric accessory 52a is opened is set to 1 [times], and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 52a at each time is set to 0.044 [s]. be.
The "long opening pattern" is an opening pattern (opening mode/opening/closing mode) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 during the normal game state. In the "long open pattern", compared to the "short open pattern", the time during which the normal electric accessory 52a is in the open state during the normal per game state is longer. Specifically, in the "long opening pattern", the number of times the normal electric accessory 52a is opened is set to 3 [times], and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 52a for the first and second times is 2.7 [s]. ], and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 52a for the third time is set to 0.1 [s].

As shown in FIG. 5, based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, when "normal pattern per pattern 1", "normal pattern per pattern 2" or "normal pattern per pattern 3" is won. , "Short release pattern" is selected and set as the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the normal per game state. As a result, the "short open pattern" is selected and set with a probability of 1/1 in the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state.
Based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, if you win the "normal pattern winning pattern 1", "normal pattern winning pattern 2" or "normal pattern winning pattern 3", the stop time of the normal pattern A first predetermined time (0.004 [s] in this embodiment) is set as (determined time). Then, as described above, the stop symbol corresponding to the "missing symbol" is stop-displayed in the normal-size mini symbol display area A4 and the normal-size fourth symbol display area A5.
Here, the "normal symbol stop time (determined time)" is the time during which the normal symbol stop display is executed in the normal symbol display device.
On the other hand, based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1, if you win the "normal pattern per pattern 1", "normal per pattern 2" or "normal per pattern 3", normal pattern A "long release pattern" is selected and set as the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the winning game state. As a result, in the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1, the "long open pattern" is selected and set with a probability of 1/1.
Based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1, when "normal pattern per pattern 1", "normal per pattern 2" or "normal per pattern 3" is won, the normal pattern is stopped. As the time (fixed time), a second predetermined time (0.5 [s] in this embodiment) longer than the first predetermined time (0.004 [s] in this embodiment) is set. . Then, as described above, the stop symbol corresponding to the "hit symbol" is stop-displayed in the normal-size mini symbol display area A4 and the normal-size fourth symbol display area A5.

On the other hand, based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 2 or the time saving state 3, when the "normal pattern per pattern 1" or "normal per pattern 2" is elected, the normal per game state "Short release pattern" is selected and set as the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a during occurrence. On the other hand, when winning the "normal pattern per pattern 3" based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 2 or the time saving state 3, the normal electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the general pattern per game state "Long release pattern" is selected and set as the release pattern of . As a result, in the normal symbol lottery executed during the time saving state 2 or time saving state 3, the "long open pattern" is selected and set with a probability of 380/65536.
Based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 2 or the time saving state 3 If you win the "normal pattern per pattern 1" or "normal per pattern 2", the normal pattern stop time (fixed time ) is set to a first predetermined time (0.004 [s] in this embodiment). Then, as described above, the stop symbol corresponding to the "missing symbol" is stop-displayed in the normal-size mini symbol display area A4 and the normal-size fourth symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when the "general pattern per pattern 3" is elected based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 2 or the time saving state 3, the second as the stop time (fixed time) of the normal pattern A predetermined time (0.5 [s] in this embodiment) is set. Then, as described above, the stop symbol corresponding to the "hit symbol" is stop-displayed in the normal-size mini symbol display area A4 and the normal-size fourth symbol display area A5.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, the first special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the first start port 51, and the second special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the second start port 52. A special design lottery is executed.
In this embodiment, "big win" and "loss" are defined as the results of the first special symbol lottery. On the other hand, as a result of the second special symbol lottery, "big win" and "minor win" are defined. In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured such that the "small hit" is not won in the first special symbol lottery. However, in the first special symbol lottery, it may be configured such that the "small hit" can be won at a lower probability than in the second special symbol lottery. Further, as a result of the first special symbol lottery, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which "big hit", "minor hit", and "lose" are defined. Furthermore, as a result of the second special symbol lottery, "big win", "minor win", and "lose" may be defined.
As shown in FIGS. 4(b) and (c), in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), the probability of winning the "big hit" is 1/219. In this embodiment, the probability of winning a "big win" or "minor win" by the special symbol lottery does not change according to the game state. Further, in this embodiment, since the set value is fixed at "3", the probability of winning the "big hit" by the special symbol lottery does not change according to the set value. Also, the probability of winning a "small hit" by the special symbol lottery does not change according to the set value. It should be noted that the probability of winning the "big hit" by the special symbol lottery may be changed according to the set value.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), in the pachinko machine 1, "jackpot pattern 1" is selected as a winning type (type of "jackpot pattern") selected when a "jackpot" is won by the first special pattern lottery. , and “jackpot pattern 2” are defined.
In the first special symbol lottery (special symbol determination), if you win the "jackpot", the probability of winning the "jackpot pattern 1" is 98/100, and the probability of winning the "jackpot pattern 2" is 2/100. 100.
When the "big hit pattern 1" is won, the stop pattern corresponding to the "big hit pattern 1" is stop-displayed on the special figure 1 display device. In particular, when the "jackpot design 1" is won based on the first special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, in the special design mini design display area A1 and the special design fourth design display area A2, "single hit The stop symbol corresponding to the "symbol" is stop-displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the "single hit symbol" is stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when the "jackpot design 1" is elected based on the first special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3, the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 4th symbol display area A2 , the stop symbol corresponding to the "single-shot winning symbol" is stopped and displayed.
Here, the "single-shot per symbol" stopped and displayed in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure fourth symbol display area A2 is, for example, stopped and displayed in the three special figure display areas of the special figure mini symbol display area A1. The special-figure mini effect patterns a1 are aligned with the special-figure mini effect patterns a1 indicating the same even number (identification information) such as "6, 6, 6", and are stopped in the special-figure fourth design display area A2. The displayed special figure 4th production pattern a2 is a display mode showing "◯".
In addition, the "single-shot winning symbol" stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5 is, for example, the same main effect symbol a5 stopped and displayed in the three effect symbol display areas, such as "6, 6, 6". The display mode is such that the main effect symbols a5 indicating even numbers (identification information) are aligned.

When the "big hit pattern 2" is won, the stop pattern corresponding to the "big hit pattern 2" is stop-displayed on the special figure 1 display device. In particular, when winning the "jackpot design 2" based on the first special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, in the special design mini design display area A1 and the special design fourth design display area A2, "Renso A stop symbol corresponding to the winning symbol is stop-displayed, and a stop symbol corresponding to the winning symbol of consecutive houses is stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when the "jackpot design 2" is elected based on the first special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3, the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 4th symbol display area A2 , the stop symbol corresponding to the "consecutive winning symbol" is stopped and displayed.
Here, the "consecutive winning design" stopped and displayed in the special-figure mini-symbol display area A1 and the special-figure fourth design display area A2 is, for example, stopped in the three special-figure display areas of the special-figure mini-symbol display area A1. The displayed special figure mini effect pattern a1 is aligned with the special figure mini effect pattern a1 showing the same odd number (identification information) such as "7, 7, 7", and in the special figure fourth symbol display area A2 The stop-displayed special-fourth production pattern a2 is set to a display mode indicating "◯".
In addition, the "consecutive winning symbols" stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5 are the same, for example, the main effect symbols a5 stopped and displayed in the three effect symbol display areas are "7, 7, 7". The display mode is such that the main effect pattern a5 showing the odd numbers (identification information) of .

As shown in FIG. 6(b), in the pachinko machine 1, "jackpot pattern 3" is selected as a winning type (type of "jackpot pattern") to be selected when a "jackpot" is won by the second special pattern lottery. , ``jackpot pattern 4'', ``jackpot pattern 5'', ``jackpot pattern 6'', ``jackpot pattern 7'' and ``jackpot pattern 8'' are defined.
In the second special symbol lottery (special symbol determination), if you win the "jackpot", the probability of winning the "jackpot pattern 3" is 20/100, and the probability of winning the "jackpot pattern 4" is 15/100. 100, probability of winning "jackpot pattern 5" is 15/100, probability of winning "jackpot pattern 6" is 30/100, probability of winning "jackpot pattern 7" is 8/100, "jackpot pattern The probability of winning 8” is 12/100.
When the "big hit pattern 3" is won, the stop pattern corresponding to the "big hit pattern 3" is stop-displayed on the special figure 2 display device. In particular, when the "jackpot design 3" is won based on the second special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, in the special design mini design display area A1 and the special design fourth design display area A2, "Renso A stop symbol corresponding to the winning symbol is stop-displayed, and a stop symbol corresponding to the winning symbol of consecutive houses is stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when the "jackpot design 3" is elected based on the second special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3, the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 4th symbol display area A2 , the stop symbol corresponding to the "consecutive winning symbol" is stopped and displayed.

When the "jackpot pattern 4" is won, the stop pattern corresponding to the "jackpot pattern 4" is stop-displayed on the special figure 2 display device. In particular, when the "jackpot design 4" is won based on the second special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, in the special design mini design display area A1 and the special design fourth design display area A2, "Renso A stop symbol corresponding to the winning symbol is stop-displayed, and a stop symbol corresponding to the winning symbol of consecutive houses is stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when the "jackpot design 4" is elected based on the second special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3, the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 4th symbol display area A2 , the stop symbol corresponding to the "consecutive winning symbol" is stopped and displayed.
When the "big hit pattern 5" is won, the stop pattern corresponding to the "big hit pattern 5" is stop-displayed on the special figure 2 display device. In particular, when the "jackpot design 5" is won based on the second special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, in the special design mini design display area A1 and the special design fourth design display area A2, "Renso A stop symbol corresponding to the winning symbol is stop-displayed, and a stop symbol corresponding to the winning symbol of consecutive houses is stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when the "jackpot design 5" is elected based on the second special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3, the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 4th symbol display area A2 , the stop symbol corresponding to the "consecutive winning symbol" is stopped and displayed.
When the "jackpot pattern 6" is won, the stop pattern corresponding to the "jackpot pattern 6" is stop-displayed in the special figure 2 display device. In particular, when the "jackpot design 6" is won based on the second special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, in the special design mini design display area A1 and the special design fourth design display area A2, "Renso A stop symbol corresponding to the winning symbol is stop-displayed, and a stop symbol corresponding to the winning symbol of consecutive houses is stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when the "jackpot design 6" is won based on the second special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3, the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 4th symbol display area A2 , the stop symbol corresponding to the "consecutive winning symbol" is stopped and displayed.

When the "jackpot pattern 7" is won, the stop pattern corresponding to the "jackpot pattern 7" is stop-displayed in the special figure 2 display device. In particular, when the "jackpot design 7" is won based on the second special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, in the special design mini design display area A1 and the special design fourth design display area A2, "Renso A stop symbol corresponding to the winning symbol is stop-displayed, and a stop symbol corresponding to the winning symbol of consecutive houses is stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when the "jackpot design 7" is elected based on the second special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3, the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 4th symbol display area A2 , the stop symbol corresponding to the "consecutive winning symbol" is stopped and displayed.
When the "jackpot pattern 8" is won, the stop pattern corresponding to the "jackpot pattern 8" is stop-displayed on the special figure 2 display device. In particular, when the "jackpot design 8" is won based on the second special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, in the special design mini design display area A1 and the special design fourth design display area A2, "single hit The stop symbol corresponding to the "symbol" is stop-displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the "single hit symbol" is stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when the "jackpot design 8" is elected based on the second special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3, the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure fourth symbol display area A2 , the stop symbol corresponding to the "single-shot winning symbol" is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 6(c), in the pachinko machine 1, as the winning type (type of "small winning design") selected when "small winning" is won by the second special design lottery, "small winning design 1", "small winning design 2", "small winning design 3", "small winning design 4", "small winning design 5", and "small winning design 6" are defined.
In the second special pattern lottery (special pattern determination), if you win the "small hit", the probability of winning the "small hit pattern 1" is 20/100, and the probability of winning the "small hit pattern 2" is , 15/100, probability of winning "small winning pattern 3" is 15/100, probability of winning "small winning pattern 4" is 30/100, probability of winning "small winning pattern 5" is 8 /100, and the probability of winning the "small winning pattern 6" is 12/100.
When the "small winning design 1" is won, the stop design corresponding to the "small winning design 1" is stop-displayed in the special figure 2 display device. In particular, when winning the "small hit design 1" based on the second special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, in the special design mini design display area A1 and the special design fourth design display area A2, "continuous The stop symbols corresponding to the "street win symbol" are stop-displayed, and the stop symbols corresponding to the "continuous manor win-symbol" are stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when the "small hit pattern 1" is elected based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3, the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 4th symbol display area At A2, the stop symbol corresponding to the "symbol winning consecutive villas" is stop-displayed.

When the "small winning design 2" is won, the stop design corresponding to the "small winning design 2" is stop-displayed in the special figure 2 display device. In particular, when winning the "small hit design 2" based on the second special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, in the special design mini design display area A1 and the special design fourth design display area A2, "continuous The stop symbols corresponding to the "street win symbol" are stop-displayed, and the stop symbols corresponding to the "continuous manor win-symbol" are stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when the "small winning pattern 2" is elected based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3, the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 4th symbol display area At A2, the stop symbol corresponding to the "symbol winning consecutive villas" is stopped and displayed.
When the "small winning design 3" is won, the stop design corresponding to the "small winning design 3" is stop-displayed in the special figure 2 display device. In particular, when winning the "small hit pattern 3" based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure fourth symbol display area A2, "continuous The stop symbols corresponding to the "street win symbol" are stop-displayed, and the stop symbols corresponding to the "continuous manor win-symbol" are stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when the "small hit pattern 3" is elected based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3, the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 4th symbol display area At A2, the stop symbol corresponding to the "symbol winning consecutive villas" is stopped and displayed.
When the "small winning design 4" is won, the stop design corresponding to the "small winning design 4" is stop-displayed in the special figure 2 display device. In particular, when winning the "small hit design 4" based on the second special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, in the special design mini design display area A1 and the special design fourth design display area A2, "continuous The stop symbols corresponding to the "street win symbol" are stop-displayed, and the stop symbols corresponding to the "continuous manor win-symbol" are stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when the "small hit pattern 4" is elected based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3, the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 4th symbol display area At A2, the stop symbol corresponding to the "symbol winning consecutive villas" is stopped and displayed.

When the "small winning design 5" is won, the stop design corresponding to the "small winning design 5" is stop-displayed in the special figure 2 display device. In particular, when winning the "small hit design 5" based on the second special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, in the special design mini design display area A1 and the special design fourth design display area A2, "continuous The stop symbols corresponding to the "street win symbol" are stop-displayed, and the stop symbols corresponding to the "continuous manor win-symbol" are stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when the "small winning pattern 5" is elected based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3, the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 4th symbol display area At A2, the stop symbol corresponding to the "symbol winning consecutive villas" is stop-displayed.
When the "small winning design 6" is won, the stop design corresponding to the "small winning design 6" is stop-displayed in the special figure 2 display device. In particular, when winning the "small hit design 6" based on the second special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, in the special design mini design display area A1 and the special design fourth design display area A2, "single shot The stop symbols corresponding to the winning symbols are stop-displayed, and the stop symbols corresponding to the single-shot winning symbols are stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when the "small winning pattern 6" is elected based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3, the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 4th symbol display area At A2, the stop symbol corresponding to the "single winning symbol" is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, when the first special symbol lottery is lost (in the case of "loss"), the stop symbol corresponding to the "loss symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device. In particular, when the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state is lost, the stop symbol corresponding to the "missing symbol" is displayed in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol fourth symbol display area A2. is stop-displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the "missing symbol" is stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3 is lost, the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 4th symbol display area A2 correspond to the "lost symbol" The stop symbol to do is stopped and displayed.
Here, the "missing pattern" stopped and displayed in the special-figure mini-symbol display area A1 and the special-figure fourth design display area A2 is, for example, stop-displayed in three special-figure display areas of the special-figure mini-symbol display area A1. The number (identification information) indicated by the special figure mini effect pattern a1 stopped and displayed in at least one special figure display area, such as "1, 6, 9", is another special figure display The combination is different from the number (identification information) indicated by the special figure mini effect pattern a1 stopped and displayed in the area, and the special figure fourth effect pattern a2 stopped and displayed in the special figure fourth design display area A2 is "x". shall be displayed.
In addition, the "missing symbols" stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5 are, for example, three main effect symbols a5 stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas, such as "1, 6, 9". A display in which the number (identification information) indicated by the main effect symbol a5 stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area is combined differently from the number (identification information) indicated by the main effect symbol a5 stopped and displayed in the other effect symbol display areas. mode.

When "big win pattern 1" to "big win pattern 8" are won, a big win game state is generated. In the jackpot game state, the special electric accessory 55a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the entry of the game ball into the jackpot 55 becomes possible (easy).
A predetermined number of round games are executed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. When "jackpot pattern 1", "jackpot pattern 2", "jackpot pattern 6", "jackpot pattern 7" or "jackpot pattern 8" is won, the number of round games is set to 3 [times]. . On the other hand, when "big hit pattern 3" is won, the number of round games is set to 10 [times]. On the other hand, when "jackpot symbol 4" is won, the number of round games is set to 7 [times]. On the other hand, when "jackpot symbol 5" is won, the number of round games is set to 5 [times].
Also, when "jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 8" are won, the maximum opening time of the special electric accessory 55a in each round game is a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment). ).
Then, each round game is (1) that the longest opening time has passed since the special electric accessory 55a was opened, and (2) the game to the big winning opening 55 during the execution of the round game The game ends when one of the following conditions is met: the number of balls entering reaches a predetermined upper limit (10 [balls] in this embodiment).

At the end of the jackpot game state, a predetermined number of times of time reduction (first number of times of time reduction, second number of times of time reduction, third number of times of time reduction) is set. Then, in response to the end of the jackpot game state, time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2 or time-saving control 3) is started according to the number of times of time-saving that has been set. Thereby, a time saving state (time saving state 1, working time saving state 2 or working time saving state 3) is started according to the end of the jackpot game state.
In the present embodiment, as types of time saving control (time saving state), time saving control 1 (time saving state 1), time saving control 2 (working time saving state 2), and working time saving control 3 (working time saving state 3) are defined. . Then, in time saving control 1 (time saving state 1), time saving control 2 (time saving state 2) and time saving control 3 (time saving state 3), if you win the "normal figure per" by normal pattern lottery, "long open pattern" different probabilities of being selected. In other words, in the time saving control 1 (time saving state 1), time saving control 2 (time saving state 2) and time saving control 3 (time saving state 3), the probability of winning the "long open pattern" based on the normal symbol lottery is different. .
In other words, if time-saving control 1 (time-saving state 1) is elected by normal pattern lottery than time-saving control 2 (time-saving state 2) or time-saving control 3 (time-saving state 3) The probability that the "open pattern" is selected is high, which is advantageous to the player. In this embodiment, in the time saving control 2 (time saving state 2) and time saving control 3 (time saving state 3), the probability that the "long open pattern" is selected when the "normal figure hit" is won by the normal symbol lottery are identical.
Concretely, when "normal pattern hit" is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of time saving state 1, "long opening pattern" is selected and set with a probability of 1/1. On the other hand, when a ``normal pattern win'' is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 2 or the time saving state 3, the ``long open pattern'' is selected and set with a probability of 380/65536.

In this embodiment, as the end conditions (hereinafter referred to as "time saving end conditions") of the time saving control (time saving control 1, time saving control 2, time saving control 3), "time saving end condition 1" and "time saving end condition 2" , “time saving end condition 3”, and “time saving end condition 4” are defined.
"Time saving end condition 1" is a condition based on the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern hit and drop determination). That is, the time saving end condition 1 is a condition based on the number of times of variable display of normal symbols. In the present embodiment, when the number of times of time saving medium figure fluctuation reaches the first time saving number of times (prescribed number of times) set at the end of the jackpot game state, the time saving end condition 1 is established.
"Time saving middle normal figure fluctuation frequency" is the number of times of normal symbol fluctuation display executed (started) during time saving control (time saving control 1, working time saving control 2 or working time saving control 3).
When the time-saving end condition 1 is established, the time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2 or time-saving control 3) is ended at the start of the variable display of normal symbols that triggered the establishment of the time-saving end condition 1.
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured with a first time-saving counter that counts the number of time-saving medium-normal diagram variations. The CPU 210 sets the first time-saving number according to the winning type (the winning symbol type) as the value of the first time-saving counter at the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, every time starting determination based on normal game information (normal game hit/loss determination) is executed (every time variable display of normal symbols is started), "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time saving counter. Then, according to the value of the first time-saving counter is subtracted from "1" to "0", time-saving end condition 1 is established, time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2 or time-saving control 3) Stop. As a result, the number of start-up determinations (ordinary figure hit/loss determination) executed during time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2 or time-saving control 3) is the first time-saving number (regulation number of times), the time saving end condition 1 is established.

"Time saving end condition 2" is a condition based on the second special symbol lottery (special symbol hit determination based on special figure 2 game information). That is, the time-saving end condition 2 is a condition based on the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol. In this embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 in time saving reaches the second time saving number of times (prescribed number of times) set at the end of the big hit game state, the time saving end condition 2 is established.
"Time saving special figure 2 fluctuation frequency" is the number of times of fluctuation display of the second special symbol executed (started) during time saving control (time saving control 1, working time saving control 2 or working time saving control 3).
When the time saving end condition 2 is satisfied, the time saving control (time saving control 1, working time saving control 2 or working time saving control 3) is ended at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol that is the trigger for the working time saving end condition 2 to be established. be.
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured with a second time-saving counter that counts the number of times of time-saving special figure 2 fluctuations. The CPU 210 sets the number of times of the second time saving according to the winning type (the type of the winning symbol) as the value of the second time saving counter at the end of the jackpot gaming state. Also, each time the starting determination (per special figure determination) based on the special figure 2 game information is executed (every time the variable display of the second special symbol is started), subtract "1" from the value of the second time saving counter do. Then, according to the value of the second time-saving counter is subtracted from "1" to "0", time-saving end condition 2 is established, time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2 or time-saving control 3) Stop. Thereby, the number of start determination (special figure hit determination) based on the special figure 2 game information executed during time saving control (time saving control 1, time saving control 2 or time saving control 3) is set at the end of the big hit game state When the second time saving number of times (prescribed number of times) is reached, the time saving end condition 2 is established.

"Time saving end condition 3" is a condition based on a special symbol lottery (special symbol hit/loss determination). That is, the time saving end condition 3 is a condition based on the number of times of variable display of special symbols. In this embodiment, when the number of times of time saving special figure total fluctuation reaches the third time saving number of times (prescribed number of times) set at the end of the jackpot gaming state, time saving end condition 3 is established.
"Time saving special figure total fluctuation number" is the number of times of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol executed (started) during time saving control (time saving control 1, time saving control 2 or time saving control 3), and the time saving control (time saving Control 1, time saving control 2 or time saving control 3) is executed (started) and the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is the total number of times.
When the time-saving end condition 3 is established, the time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2 or time-saving control 3) is ended at the start of the variable display of the special symbol that triggered the establishment of the time-saving end condition 3.
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured with a third time-saving counter that counts the number of times of time-saving special figure total variation. The CPU 210 sets the third time-saving number of times according to the winning type (the winning symbol type) as the value of the third time-saving counter at the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, whenever the start determination (special figure hit determination) based on the special figure game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is executed (special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) fluctuation Each time display is started), "1" is subtracted from the value of the third time saving counter. Then, according to the value of the second time-saving counter is subtracted from "1" to "0", time-saving end condition 3 is established, time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2 or time-saving control 3) Stop. Thereby, starting determination (special figure hit determination) based on special figure game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) executed during time saving control (time saving control 1, working time saving control 2 or working time saving control 3) When the number of times reaches the third time-saving number of times (prescribed number of times) set at the end of the jackpot game state, the time-saving end condition 3 is established.

"Time-saving end condition 4" is a condition based on winning the "jackpot" (jackpot game state). In this embodiment, when the "jackpot" is won (when the jackpot game state is generated), the time-saving end condition 4 is established.
When the time saving end condition 4 is satisfied, the time saving control (time saving control 1, time saving control 2 or time saving control 3) is ended at the end of the stop display of the "big hit pattern".
In addition, "time saving end condition 5" may be included as time saving end conditions. "Time saving end condition 5" is a condition based on winning the "minor win" (minor win gaming state). That is, when the "small hit" is won (when the small win game state is generated), the time saving end condition 5 is established. At this time, if the time-saving end condition 5 is met, at the start of the special symbol lottery (start judgment) that won the "small hit", at the start of the special symbol lottery that won the "small hit" ( At the start of the stop display of the special symbol based on the start determination), at the start of the small winning game state (or small winning game), and at the end of the small winning game state (or small winning game) At this timing, the time saving control (time saving control 1, working time saving control 2 or working time saving control 3) may be terminated.
Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of time-saving medium figure winning times reaches the first time-saving number of times set at the end of the jackpot game state, the time-saving end condition 1 may be established. The ``number of winning times of normal drawing in time saving'' is the number of winning times of ``per normal drawing'' based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the time saving control (time saving control 1, time saving control 2 or time saving control 3). That is, on the condition that the number of times elected to "per normal figure" based on the normal pattern lottery executed during time saving control (time saving control 1, time saving control 2 or time saving control 3) has reached the first time saving number of times, The time saving control (time saving control 1 or working time saving control 2) may be terminated.

As shown in FIG. 6 (a) or (b), "normal state" or "time saving state 1" ~ "time saving state 3" was elected to "big hit pattern 1" based on the start determination executed during the occurrence In the case, at the end of the jackpot game state, 100 [times] is set as the first number of times of time saving, 1 [times] is set as the second number of times of time saving, and 5 [times] is set as the third number of times of time saving. be. Then, the time saving control 2 is started according to the end of the jackpot game state. As a result, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes the time saving state 2.例文帳に追加
On the other hand, "normal state" or "time-saving state 1" ~ "time-saving state 3" based on the start determination that is executed during the occurrence of "big hit pattern 2" ~ "big hit design 7" If you win, the big hit game state At the end, 100 [times] is set as the first number of times of time saving, 1 [times] is set as the second number of times of time saving, and 5 [times] is set as the third number of times of time saving. And, time saving control 1 is started according to the end of the jackpot game state. Thereby, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes the time saving state 1.例文帳に追加
On the other hand, if "big hit pattern 8" is elected based on the start determination executed during the occurrence of "normal state" or "time saving state 1" to "time saving state 3", at the end of the big hit game state, the first time saving 33 [times] is set as the number of times, 1 [times] is set as the second number of times of time saving, and 5 [times] is set as the third number of times of time saving. Then, the time saving control 3 is started according to the end of the jackpot game state. Thereby, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes the time saving state 3.例文帳に追加

When "small winning symbol 1" to "small winning symbol 6" are won, a small winning game state is generated. In the small winning game state, the special electric accessory 55a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the entry of the game ball into the big winning opening 55 becomes possible (easy).
During the occurrence of the small winning game state, a predetermined number of small winning games are executed. When "small winning pattern 1" to "small winning pattern 6" are won, the number of small winning games is set to 1 [time].
Also, when "small winning pattern 1" to "small winning pattern 6" are won, the maximum opening time of the special electric accessory 55a in each small winning game is a predetermined time (29.0 in this embodiment). [s]).
Then, each small winning game is (1) that the longest opening time has passed since the special electric accessory 55a was opened, and (2) to the big winning opening 55 during the execution of the small winning game. The number of game balls entered reaches a predetermined upper limit number (10 [balls] in this embodiment).
Further, in each small winning game, the sorting means is displaced from the non-V passing state to the V passing state. At this time, in each small-hit game, the sorting means is set to the non-V area in such a manner that the game ball entered into the big-winning opening 55 during execution of the small-hit game can easily (possibly) pass through the V area. It is displaced from the pass state to the V pass state. As a result, when "small winning pattern 1" to "small winning pattern 6" are won, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V region during the occurrence of the small winning game state. It should be noted that, as the type of the "small winning pattern", a type may be defined that makes it difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small winning game state.

When passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small winning game state (when passage of the V area by the game ball entering the big winning opening 55 is detected during execution of the small winning game) , a big hit game state is generated in response to the end of the small hit game state.
At this time, when "small winning pattern 1" is won and passage of the game ball through the V area is detected while the small winning game state is occurring, the number of round games is set to 9 [times]. . As a result, 10 [times] rounds are executed with the small winning game as the first round game.
On the other hand, when the "small winning symbol 2" is won and the passing of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small winning game state, the number of round games is set to 6 [times]. As a result, 7 [times] rounds are executed with the small winning game as the first round game.
On the other hand, when "small winning symbol 3" is won and passage of the game ball through the V area is detected while the small winning game state is occurring, the number of round games is set to 4 [times]. As a result, 5 [times] rounds are executed with the small winning game as the first round game.
On the other hand, when "small winning pattern 4" to "small winning pattern 6" are won, and passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small winning game state, the number of round games is 2 [ times]. As a result, 3 [times] rounds are executed with the small winning game as the first round game.
In addition, when "small winning pattern 1" to "small winning pattern 6" are won, and passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small winning game state, special in each round game The longest open time of the electric accessory 55a is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment).
Then, each round game is (1) that the longest opening time has passed since the special electric accessory 55a was opened, and (2) the game to the big winning opening 55 during the execution of the round game The game ends when one of the following conditions is met: the number of balls entering reaches a predetermined upper limit (10 [balls] in this embodiment).
On the other hand, if the passing of the game ball through the V area is not detected while the small winning game state is occurring ), the jackpot gaming state is not generated.

As shown in FIG. 6(c), "normal state" or "time saving state 1" to "time saving state 3" based on the start determination executed during occurrence of "small hit design 1" to "small hit design 5 ”, and when the passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small winning game state, 100 [times] is set as the first time saving number of times at the end of the big winning game state. , 1 [times] is set as the second number of times of time saving, and 5 [times] is set as the third number of times of time saving. And, time saving control 1 is started according to the end of the jackpot game state. As a result, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes the time saving state 1.例文帳に追加
On the other hand, "normal state" or "time saving state 1" to "time saving state 3" are elected based on the start determination executed during occurrence, and during the occurrence of the small winning game state When the passage of the V area by the game ball is detected, at the end of the jackpot game state, 33 [times] is set as the first number of times of time saving, and 1 [times] is set as the second number of times of time saving, 5 [times] is set as the third time saving frequency. Then, the time saving control 3 is started according to the end of the jackpot game state. As a result, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes the time saving state 3.例文帳に追加

(About play time counter)
In the pachinko machine 1, the time saving control (time saving state) is started when the special figure total fluctuation frequency reaches a predetermined play time frequency without causing a jackpot game state.
"Total number of special symbol fluctuations" is the total number of the number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol.
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured with a play time counter that counts the number of special figure total fluctuations. The CPU 210 sets a predetermined play time count (600 [times] in this embodiment) as the value of the play time counter in the RAM clearing initialization process (step S1-30), which will be described later. Also, every time the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is completed, "1" is subtracted from the value of the play time counter. Then, when the idle time counter value is decremented from "1" to "0", time saving control is started. Further, when the big win game state is generated, a predetermined number of times of play time (600 [times] in this embodiment) is set as the value of the game time counter at the end of the big win game state.
In this embodiment, in response to the value of the play time counter being subtracted from "1" to "0", 100 [times] is set as the first number of times of time saving, and 1 [times] is set as the second number of times of saving time. ] is set, 5 [times] is set as the third number of times of time saving, and time saving control 1 (time saving state 1) is started. In addition, according to the value of the idle time counter being subtracted from "1" to "0", 100 [times] is set as the first number of times of time saving, and 1 [times] is set as the second number of times of saving time. 5 [times] is set as the third number of times of time saving, and time saving control 2 (time saving state 2) may be started. Alternatively, in response to the idle time counter value being subtracted from "1" to "0", 33 [times] is set as the first number of times of time saving, and 1 [times] is set as the second number of times of saving time. 5 [times] is set as the third number of times of time saving, and time saving control 3 (time saving state 3) may be started.

(Regarding the end timing of the time-saving state)
Next, the end timing of the time saving state will be described.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, as the time-saving end condition, the time-saving end condition 1 based on the number of times of variable display of normal symbols is defined. That is, when the number of times of time reduction medium figure fluctuation reaches the first time reduction number of times set at the end of the jackpot game state, the time reduction end condition 1 is established, and the time reduction control is stopped (time reduction state is ended). .
In the following description, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol executed during the occurrence of the time saving state (time saving state 1 to time saving state 3) reaches the first time saving number of times, the first time saving number of normal symbols The change display is set to "Final normal figure change". That is, the final normal pattern fluctuation is a normal pattern fluctuation display that satisfies the time saving end condition 1.
Here, when the structure is such that "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time reduction counter at the start or end of the stop display of the normal symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols started during the occurrence of the big win game state is the big win. When the game state ends after the game state ends, the value of the first time-saving counter related to the time-saving state started after the big-hit game state ends based on the variable display of the normal symbols started during the occurrence of the big-hit game state. It is subtracted, and the player cannot enjoy the advantage of the time saving state for the variable display of the normal symbols for one time, which may be disadvantageous to the player.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, at the start of the variable display of normal symbols, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time saving counter, and the end of the time saving state is determined. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the value of the first time-saving counter relating to the time-saving state started after the end of the big-win game state is subtracted based on the variable display of the normal symbols started during the occurrence of the big-hit game state. becomes possible.
Also, at the start of the variable display of the normal pattern, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time saving counter, and the end of the time saving state is determined. Judgment, normal pattern stop pattern determination, normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) is executed, if it is configured to determine the end of the time saving state, before the start determination related to the final normal pattern fluctuation is executed, time saving The state is terminated and the normal state is entered. As a result, as the variation pattern related to the final normal pattern fluctuation, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the normal pattern per game state related to the final normal pattern fluctuation, etc., the one corresponding to the normal state is selected, and the final normal pattern There is a risk that the player will not be able to enjoy the benefit of the time saving state with respect to the figure fluctuation, which will be disadvantageous to the player.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the starting determination based on the normal game information (normal pattern winning determination, normal pattern stop pattern determination, normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) is executed, "1" from the value of the first time saving counter is subtracted, and the end of the time saving state is determined, and based on the game state at the time of the start determination, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the normal per game state is selected. and This prevents the situation where the benefits of the short-time state cannot be enjoyed for the final normal chart fluctuation.

Specifically, the CPU 210, in the normal pattern variation waiting process (see FIG. 35) that is executed at the start of the normal symbol variation display, first, based on the current game state, the start determination (normal symbol win-lose determination process (step S20-5), general pattern stop symbol determination processing (step S20-6), general pattern variation pattern determination processing (step S20-8), etc.) are executed, and then, based on the current game state, per normal pattern Select the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a during the game state, set information specifying the selected release pattern in the release pattern specification flag area (release pattern setting process (step S20-12)), and then Then, the number cutting management process (step S20-14) is executed. Then, in the number cutting management process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time saving counter, and when the value of the first time saving counter is subtracted from "1" to "0", the time saving control is stopped (time saving state ).
Further, the CPU 210 performs normal electric role control based on the information set in the opening pattern designation flag area in the normal electric role control data setting process (step S22-4) executed when the stop display of the normal symbols ends. Select and set the table.
As a result, regarding the final normal pattern fluctuation that is started during the occurrence of the time saving states 2 and 3, based on the fact that the time saving states 2 and 3 are occurring, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), the occurrence of the game state per normal pattern It is possible to select and set the opening pattern of the normal electric accessories 52a inside.
That is, when the final normal figure fluctuation is started during the occurrence of the time saving states 2 and 3, the time saving states 2 and 3 are terminated at the start of the final normal figure fluctuation, and the normal state is started. As a result, the normal state is generated during the execution of the final normal pattern fluctuation, during the execution of the stop display of the normal pattern related to the final normal pattern fluctuation, and during the occurrence of the normal pattern per game state related to the final normal pattern fluctuation. ing. However, regarding the variation pattern (fluctuation time) related to the final normal pattern fluctuation, the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the normal pattern per game state related to the final normal pattern fluctuation, etc., the game state is the time saving state 2, 3 It is possible to select and set information based on the fact that

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the time saving end condition 2 based on the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is defined as the time saving end condition. That is, when the number of fluctuations in the time saving special figure 2 reaches the second time saving number of times set at the end of the jackpot game state, the time saving end condition 2 is established, and the time saving control is stopped (time saving state ends). be.
In the following description, when the variable display of the second special symbol executed during the occurrence of the time saving state (time saving state 1 to time saving state 3) reaches the second time saving number of times, the second time saving number of times The variation display of the 2 special symbols is referred to as "final special figure 2 variation". That is, the final special figure 2 variation is a variation display of the second special symbol that establishes the time saving end condition 2.
Here, in the second special symbol lottery, a "big win" or "small win" is won with a probability of 1/1. As a result, when the stop display of the second special symbol is started or ended, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second time-saving counter, and the end of the time-saving state is determined. As for the variation display of the normal symbols to be started in , "Long open pattern" is selected as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a related to the normal per game state, and the per normal game state is related to the final special figure 2 variation It is executed across the jackpot game state, and the player may feel a sense of incompatibility. In particular, when a variation pattern with a long variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the variation display of the normal symbol that is started during the execution of the final special figure 2 variation, after the jackpot game state related to the final special figure 2 variation is completed , it is necessary to wait for the start of the next normal symbol variation display until the variation display of the normal symbol ends, and the player may feel uncomfortable.
Therefore, in this embodiment, at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second time saving counter, and the end of the time saving state is determined. As a result, when the game ball enters the second starting port 52 during the normal game state, the time saving state can be ended immediately. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable as described above.

Specifically, in the special figure variation waiting process (see FIG. 21) executed at the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, the CPU 210 first determines the start (special figure per determination process) based on the current gaming state. (Step S11-6), special figure pattern determination processing (step S11-7), special figure variation pattern determination processing (step S11-10), etc.) are executed, and then, based on the current game state, the big hit game Select the type of time saving state that starts after the end of the state (time saving state 1 to time saving state 3) and the number of time saving times (first time saving number, second time saving number, third time saving number), and in the preliminary time saving control flag area of RAM 230 , Set information specifying the type of the selected time saving state, set the selected number of time saving times in the preliminary time saving number counter (game state preliminary setting process (step S11-14)), and then manage the number of cuts Processing (step S11-15) is executed. Then, in the number cutting management process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second time saving counter, and when the value of the second time saving counter is subtracted from "1" to "0", the time saving control is stopped (time saving state ).
In addition, the CPU210, in the game state setting process (step S43-2) executed at the end of the jackpot game state, based on the information set in the spare time reduction control flag area, starts after the jackpot game state ends Along with setting the type of time saving state (time saving state 1 to time saving state 3), based on the number of time saving times set in the preliminary time saving counter, the number of time saving state starting after the end of the big hit game state (first time saving Set the number of times to the third time reduction number of times).
As a result, the final special figure 2 variation that is started during the occurrence of the time saving state 1, 2, 3 is based on the fact that the time saving state 1, 2, 3 is occurring, the variation pattern (variation time), the big hit game It is possible to select and set the game state (type of time saving state, number of times of time saving) etc. after the end of the state.
That is, if the final special figure 2 variation is started during the occurrence of the time saving state 1, 2, 3, the time saving state 1, 2, 3 is terminated at the start of the final special figure 2 variation, and the normal state be started. As a result, during the execution of the final special figure 2 variation, during the execution of the stop display of the second special symbol related to the final special figure 2 variation, and during the occurrence of the jackpot game state related to the final special figure 2 variation, the normal state is occurring. However, regarding the variation pattern (variation time) related to the final special figure 2 variation, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state related to the final special figure 2 variation (type of time saving state, number of times of time saving), etc., the game state is a time saving state It is possible to select and set information based on 1, 2, and 3.

(Regarding game progress)
Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the transition of game states.
In the pachinko machine 1, when a ``jackpot'' is won by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), a game ball can (easily) enter a big winning hole 55. is generated.
Further, when a "small win" is won by the second special symbol lottery, a small win game state is generated in which the game ball can enter (easy) the big winning hole 55.例文帳に追加Furthermore, when passage of the V area by the game ball entering the big winning hole 55 is detected while the small winning game state is occurring, the game ball entering the big winning hole 55 becomes possible (easily). A jackpot gaming state is generated.
Then, the player can win many prize balls by entering the game balls into the big winning hole 55.例文帳に追加
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the probability of generating a big win game state based on the second special symbol lottery is higher than the probability of generating a big win game state based on the first special symbol lottery. .
Specifically, in the first special symbol lottery, since "small win" is not set as the lottery result, the big win game state is generated only when "big win" is won. The probability of winning the "jackpot" by the first special symbol lottery is 1/219 (probability corresponding to the set value).
On the other hand, in the second special symbol lottery, since "big win" and "minor win" are set as the lottery results, when the "big win" is won, a big win gaming state is generated and the "minor win" occurs. A big win game state is generated when a game ball is detected to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small win game state. In particular, the probability of winning the "big win" or "small win" by the second special symbol lottery is 1/1.
Thus, in the second special symbol lottery, since the big win game state can be generated via the small win game state, the probability of the occurrence of the big win game state is lower than that of the first special symbol lottery. getting higher.
As a result, in the pachinko machine 1, obtaining the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery rather than obtaining the opportunity of the first special symbol lottery increases the possibility of causing a big win game state, and the player is encouraged. be advantageous.

In order to acquire the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery wins the ``normal pattern winning'', and the normal electric accessory 52a is in the open state during the occurrence of the normal symbol game state. Sometimes, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52 .
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, a "short release pattern" and a "long release pattern" are defined as the release patterns of the normal electric accessory 52a during the normal per game state. Then, when the "short open pattern" is selected, it becomes difficult (impossible) to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52 during the occurrence of the per normal game state. On the other hand, when the "long open pattern" is selected, it becomes easy (possible) to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52 during the occurrence of the per-normal game state.
In particular, during the occurrence of the normal state, the "short open pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1 when the "normal pattern hit" is won by the normal pattern lottery. As a result, when the normal pattern lottery wins the "normal pattern hit" during the normal state, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second start port 52 with a probability of 1/1 (second It becomes difficult to acquire the opportunity of the special design lottery).
On the other hand, during the time-saving state 1, when "normal pattern hit" is won by the normal pattern lottery, the "long open pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1. As a result, during the occurrence of the time saving state 1, if the "normal pattern hit" is won by the normal pattern lottery, the game ball can be easily entered into the second start port 52 with a probability of 1/1 (second 2 It is easy to get the opportunity for a special symbol lottery).
On the other hand, during the time-saving state 2 or the time-saving state 3, when the normal pattern lottery wins the "normal pattern", the "long open pattern" is selected with a probability of 380/65536. Thereby, during the occurrence of the time saving state 2 or the time saving state 3, when the "normal pattern hit" is won by the normal pattern lottery, the game ball enters the second start port 52 with a probability of 380/65536. is easy (easy to get the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery).

As described above, during the occurrence of the normal state, the "short open pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1 when the "normal pattern win" is won by the normal symbol lottery. As a result, it becomes virtually impossible to obtain the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery even if the player wins the "general symbol lottery" by the normal symbol lottery. Therefore, the player progresses the game with the aim of winning the "jackpot" by the first special symbol lottery in order to shift the game state to the time saving state 1 or the time saving state 2.例文帳に追加In other words, the game ball is launched into the left path with the aim of entering the game ball into the first starting hole 51 . When a 'big hit' is won by the first special pattern lottery, the game state shifts to a time saving state 1 or a time saving state 2 according to the winning pattern after the big win game state is finished.
On the other hand, during the time-saving state 1, when "normal pattern hit" is won by the normal pattern lottery, the "long open pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1. This makes it easy to obtain the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery if the player wins the "general symbol lottery" by the normal symbol lottery. Therefore, the player progresses the game with the aim of winning the "long release pattern" based on the normal symbol lottery in order to acquire the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery. In other words, the game ball is launched toward the right path with the aim of passing the starting gate 41 by the game ball. In particular, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the "general prize" by the normal symbol lottery is set to 1/1, and the probability of winning the "big hit" or "small hit" by the second special symbol lottery. is assumed to be 1/1. As a result, when shifting to the time saving state 1, it is possible to almost certainly generate a big win game state based on one normal symbol lottery. When a ``small win'' or a ``big win'' is won by the second special pattern lottery, the game state shifts to a time saving state 1 or a time saving state 3 according to the winning pattern after the big win game state is finished.

On the other hand, during the occurrence of time saving state 2, when "normal pattern hit" is won by normal pattern lottery, "long open pattern" is selected with a probability of 380/65536. This makes it easy to obtain the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery with a probability of 380/65536 when winning the "normal symbol lottery" by the normal symbol lottery. Therefore, the player progresses the game with the aim of winning the "long release pattern" based on the normal symbol lottery in order to acquire the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery. In other words, the game ball is launched toward the right path with the aim of passing the starting gate 41 by the game ball. When a ``small win'' or a ``big win'' is won by the second special pattern lottery, the game state shifts to a time saving state 1 or a time saving state 3 according to the winning pattern after the big win game state is finished. On the other hand, when the variable display of normal symbols is executed for the first time reduction number of times (100 times) without winning the "small hit" or "big hit" by the second special symbol lottery, the game state changes to the normal state. Transition.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of time saving state 3, when "normal pattern hit" is won by normal pattern lottery, "long open pattern" is selected with a probability of 380/65536. This makes it easy to obtain the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery with a probability of 380/65536 when winning the "normal symbol lottery" by the normal symbol lottery. Therefore, the player progresses the game with the aim of winning the "long release pattern" based on the normal symbol lottery in order to acquire the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery. In other words, the game ball is launched toward the right path with the aim of passing the starting gate 41 by the game ball. When a ``small win'' or a ``big win'' is won by the second special pattern lottery, the game state shifts to a time saving state 1 or a time saving state 3 according to the winning pattern after the big win game state is finished. On the other hand, when the variable display of normal symbols is executed for the first time reduction number of times (33 times) without winning the "small hit" or "big hit" by the second special symbol lottery, the game state changes to the normal state. Transition.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the RAM clearing initialization process (step S1-30), which will be described later, is executed, the normal state occurs. During the normal state, if the normal pattern lottery wins the "normal pattern", the "short open pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1 (the probability that the "long open pattern" is selected is , becomes 0%).
As shown in FIG. 7, when "jackpot pattern 1" is won based on the first special pattern lottery executed while the normal state is occurring, time saving state 2 occurs in accordance with the end of the jackpot game state. be done. On the other hand, when a ``jackpot pattern 2'' is won based on the first special pattern lottery executed during the generation of the normal state, the time saving state 1 is generated in response to the termination of the jackpot game state.
When a ``normal pattern win'' is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1, the ``long open pattern'' is selected with a probability of 1/1. As a result, when the "normal pattern per" is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1, there is a probability of 1/1, during the occurrence of the general pattern per game state, the second It becomes easy to enter the game ball into the starting port 52.例文帳に追加Also, in the second special symbol lottery, a "big hit" or "small hit" is won with a probability of 1/1. As a result, when a game ball enters the second starting port 52, a big win game state is generated with a probability of 1/1. Then, when "normal pattern win" is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1, a big win game state is caused with a probability of 1/1.

When ``jackpot pattern 3'' to ``jackpot pattern 7'' are won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1, the time saving state 1 is generated in response to the end of the jackpot game state. be done. On the other hand, when a ``big hit pattern 8'' is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1, the time saving state 3 is caused according to the end of the big win game state. On the other hand, ``small hit pattern 1'' to ``big hit pattern 5'' are won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1, and V by the game ball during the occurrence of the small win game state. When the passage of the area is detected, the time saving state 1 is generated in accordance with the end of the jackpot game state. On the other hand, "small hit pattern 6" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1, and passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state. In this case, a time saving state 3 is generated in response to the end of the jackpot game state.

When winning the "normal pattern win" based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 2, the "long open pattern" is selected with a probability of 380/65536. As a result, when winning the "normal pattern lottery" based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 2, the probability of 380/65536 is 380/65536. It becomes easy to enter the game ball into the starting port 52.例文帳に追加Also, as described above, in the second special symbol lottery, the "big hit" or "small hit" is won with a probability of 1/1. As a result, when a game ball enters the second starting port 52, a big win game state is generated with a probability of 1/1. Then, when "normal pattern win" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of time saving state 2, a big win game state is caused with a probability of 380/65536.
When ``jackpot pattern 3'' to ``jackpot pattern 7'' are won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 2, the time saving state 1 is generated in response to the end of the jackpot game state. be done. On the other hand, when a ``jackpot pattern 8'' is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 2, the time saving state 3 is generated according to the end of the big win game state. On the other hand, ``small hit pattern 1'' to ``big hit pattern 5'' are won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 2, and V by the game ball during the occurrence of the small win game state. When the passage of the area is detected, the time saving state 1 is generated in accordance with the end of the jackpot game state. On the other hand, "small hit pattern 6" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 2, and passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state. In this case, a time saving state 3 is generated in response to the end of the jackpot game state. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the time saving state 2, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol of the first time saving number of times (specifically, 100 times) is executed without the occurrence of the jackpot game state, according to this , the normal state is raised.

When winning the "normal pattern win" based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 3, the "long open pattern" is selected with a probability of 380/65536. As a result, when winning the "normal pattern lottery" based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 3, the probability of 380/65536 is 380/65536. It becomes easy to enter the game ball into the starting port 52.例文帳に追加Also, as described above, in the second special symbol lottery, the "big hit" or "small hit" is won with a probability of 1/1. As a result, when a game ball enters the second starting port 52, a big win game state is generated with a probability of 1/1. Then, when "normal pattern win" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 3, a big win game state is caused with a probability of 380/65536.
When ``big win pattern 3'' to ``jackpot pattern 7'' are won based on the second special pattern lottery executed while the time saving state 3 is occurring, the time saving state 1 is generated according to the end of the big win game state. be done. On the other hand, when a ``big hit pattern 8'' is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed while the time saving state 3 is occurring, the time saving state 3 is caused according to the end of the big win game state. On the other hand, ``small hit pattern 1'' to ``big hit pattern 5'' are won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 3, and V by the game ball during the occurrence of the small win game state. When the passage of the area is detected, the time saving state 1 is generated in accordance with the end of the jackpot game state. On the other hand, "small hit pattern 6" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 3, and passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state. In this case, a time saving state 3 is generated in response to the end of the jackpot game state. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the time saving state 3, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol of the first time saving number of times (specifically, 33 times) is executed without the occurrence of the jackpot game state, according to this. , the normal state is raised.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 defines a plurality of game states (specifically, the normal state, the time saving state 1, the time saving state 2 and the time saving state 3) with different occurrence probabilities of the big win game state (small win game state). becomes possible.
That is, during the occurrence of the normal state, the "short open pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1 when the "normal pattern win" is won by the normal symbol lottery. Thus, the big winning game state is not generated based on the second special symbol lottery, and the big winning game state is generated only based on the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, with a probability of 1/219, a jackpot game state is generated.
On the other hand, during the time-saving state 1, when "normal pattern hit" is won by the normal pattern lottery, the "long open pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1. In particular, the probability of winning the "normal hit" by the normal pattern lottery is 1/1, and the probability of winning the "big hit" or "small hit" by the second special pattern lottery is 1/1. It is said that As a result, when shifting to the time saving state 1, it is possible to almost certainly generate a big win game state (small win game state) based on one normal symbol lottery. Therefore, with a probability of 1/1, a jackpot game state is generated.
On the other hand, during the time-saving state 2 or the time-saving state 3, when the normal pattern lottery wins the "normal pattern", the "long open pattern" is selected with a probability of 380/65536. In particular, the probability of winning the "normal hit" by the normal pattern lottery is 1/1, and the probability of winning the "big hit" or "small hit" by the second special pattern lottery is 1/1. It is said that Therefore, with a probability of 380/65536, a big hit game state (small hit game state) is generated.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to improve the playability.

(About various productions)
Next, various effects executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the normal state is occurring, a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special A display for announcing the result of the symbol lottery is executed. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is notified by the combination of the three first main performance symbols a5 stopped and displayed in the main performance symbol display area A5.
Further, when the normal state is occurring, the reserved design h corresponding to the special design lottery (the special figure 1 game information or the special figure 2 game information) is displayed in the reserved design display areas B1 and B2.
Furthermore, when the normal state is occurring, various advance notice effects suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) are executed. Specifically, when the start determination based on the special figure game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is executed during the occurrence of the normal state, during the fluctuation display of the special symbol based on the start determination , A notice effect that suggests the result of the start judgment (a notice effect that suggests the result of the special pattern hit judgment, a notice effect that suggests the result of the special pattern pattern judgment, a notice effect that suggests the result of the special pattern fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.) is executed. In addition, when the normal state is occurring, various advance notice effects suggesting the result of the normal symbol lottery are not executed.

On the other hand, when the time-saving state 1 to the time-saving state 3 are occurring, in the main effect pattern display area A5, the result of the normal symbol lottery (especially, the normal pattern stop symbol determination) is notified using the second main effect symbol a5. A display is executed to Then, the result of the normal symbol lottery (particularly, the normal symbol stop symbol determination) is notified by the combination of the three second main effect symbols a5 stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5. At this time, when the "long release pattern" is won, the stop symbol corresponding to the "win symbol" is stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when the "short open pattern" is won, the stop symbol corresponding to the "lost symbol" is stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5.
Further, when the time saving state 1 to time saving state 3 are occurring, the reserved design h corresponding to the normal design lottery (general design game information) is displayed in the reserved design display areas B1 and B2.
Furthermore, when the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3 are occurring, various advance notice effects suggesting the result of the normal symbol lottery are executed. Specifically, when the start determination based on the normal game information is executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3, the result of the start determination is suggested during the normal symbol fluctuation display based on the start determination. Notice effect (result of normal pattern stop pattern judgment (specifically, which open pattern was won among "long open pattern" and "short open pattern", possibility of winning "long open pattern", etc. ) is executed. In addition, when the time saving state 1 to time saving state 3 are occurring, various advance notice effects suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) are not executed.

(About hitting to the right)
Next, the notification of hitting to the right executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, right-handed information is executed during the right-handed hitting period (right-handed state). The right-handed informing is always (continuously) performed during the right-handed period. In the present embodiment, as the right-handed notification, the right-handed display device displays right-handed designation information, and the display screen 31a displays a right-handed notification image.
"Right-handed designation information" is information for designating a right-handed path as a path for hitting a game ball.
The "right shot notification image" is an image (information) that instructs (notifies) the player to launch the game ball to the right path.
In this embodiment, a left-handed period (left-handed state) is set in the RAM clear initialization process (step S1-30). Then, when a ``small hit'' is won based on the special symbol lottery executed during the left-handed period, the left-handed period is ended and the right-handed period is started in response to the start of the small winning game state. be. Alternatively, when a ``jackpot'' is won based on a special pattern lottery executed during the left-handed period, the left-handed period is ended and the right-handed period is started in accordance with the start of the big-hit game state. Alternatively, when the value of the idle time counter is decremented from "1" to "0", the left-handed period ends and the right-handed period starts.
The right hitting period is continued as long as any one of the time saving state (time saving state 1 to time saving state 3), small hit game state, and big hit game state is generated. Then, when the time saving state (time saving state 2 or time saving state 3) is terminated by digesting the time saving number of times (first time saving number or third time saving number), the right hitting period ends and the left hitting period starts. be.
Here, as described above, when the number of times of variable display of normal symbols executed during the occurrence of the time saving states 2 and 3 reaches the first time saving number of times (when the first time saving number of times is digested), At the start of the variation display (final normal pattern variation) of the first time saving number of normal symbols, the time saving states 2 and 3 are terminated and the normal state is started.
However, in the present embodiment, in the normal symbol lottery, since "per normal pattern" is won with a probability of 1/1, the normal per pattern game state is always generated after the end of the final normal pattern fluctuation. By this, when the final normal pattern fluctuation starts, according to the start of the normal state, if the right-handed hitting period is terminated, during the occurrence of the normal pattern per game state related to the final normal pattern fluctuation, to the left path A game ball is launched, which may be disadvantageous to the player.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the time saving states 2 and 3 are ended based on the final normal pattern fluctuation (satisfaction of the time saving end condition 1), at least, the normal pattern per game state related to the final normal pattern fluctuation ends Until then, the right-handed period (right-handed notification) is continued.
In particular, when the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 is detected during the occurrence of the game state per normal pattern related to the final normal pattern fluctuation (when the second special symbol lottery is executed), at least, The right hitting period (right hitting) is continued until the variable display/stop display of the second special symbol based on the detection ends. In this case, the small winning game state or the big winning game state is always generated based on the second special symbol lottery. notification) will be continued.
On the other hand, at the end of the game state per normal pattern related to the final normal pattern fluctuation, when the entry of the game ball into the second start port 52 is not detected (when the second special symbol lottery is not executed) , According to the end of the game state per normal pattern, the right-handed period (right-handed) is ended, and the left-handed period is started.
As described above, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the final normal pattern fluctuation, during the stop display of the normal pattern pertaining to the final normal pattern fluctuation, and during the occurrence of the normal pattern per game state pertaining to the final normal pattern fluctuation, the normal state However, right-handed information is executed.
Here, as will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 outputs test information (test signal) indicating the internal state. In particular, the test signal is output according to the game state and the period of hitting to the right. That is, during the occurrence of each game state (normal state, time saving state 1, time saving state 2, and time saving state 3, respectively), a test signal designating the game state is output. Also, during the left-handed period, a test signal designating the left-handed period is output. On the other hand, during the right-handed period, a test signal designating the right-handed period is output.

(Regarding control commands)
Next, control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 and control commands transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 will be described.
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, the communication between the main control board 200 and the production control board 300 is performed only in one direction from the main control board 200 to the production control board 300, and the communication from the production control board 300 to the main control board 200 is Not done.
Each control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 consists of 1-byte upper data indicating the type of control command and 1-byte lower data indicating the content of the control command. there is
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command composed of upper data and lower data to the effect control board 300 by serial communication. When the effect control board 300 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 include a special figure design specification command, a special figure variation mode specification command, a special figure variation pattern specification command, and a special figure stop specification command. , General pattern type specification command, General pattern variation pattern specification command, General pattern stop specification command, Game state specification command, Special figure reservation number specification command, General figure reservation number specification command, Opening specification command, Round start specification command, Round An end designation command, an ending designation command, a V prize designation command, a first prefetch designation command, a second prefetch designation command, a third prefetch designation command, an error designation command, a demonstration designation command, a setting value designation command, and the like are set.
The special symbol type specification command is the type of special symbol stop symbol (“lost symbol”, “big hit symbol 1” to “big hit symbol 8” and “small hit symbol 1” to “small hit symbol 6”). This is a command that specifies the type of The special symbol type specification command is transmitted at the start of the variable display of the special symbols. Here, the special figure symbol type specifying command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information).

The special figure variation mode specification command is a command that specifies the type (variation mode number) of the variation mode of the special symbol. Special figure fluctuation mode specification command specifies the fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation mode number by specifying the fluctuation mode number. The special figure variation mode specification command designates the variation time of the first half period (form of the first half of the variation presentation) of the variation display (variation presentation) of the special symbol.
In the present embodiment, m (plural) types are set as the types of the variation mode of the special symbols, each of which is associated with a different variation time. Then, the special figure variation mode specification command specifies one ("variation mode m") of the m types of variation mode types (variation mode numbers).
The special figure variation pattern specification command is a command that specifies the type of variation pattern of the special symbol (variation pattern number). Special figure variation pattern specification command specifies the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by specifying the variation pattern number. The special figure variation pattern designation command designates the variation time of the latter half period (mode of the latter half period of the variation performance) of the variation display (variation performance) of the special symbols.
In the present embodiment, n (plural) types are set as the types of variation patterns of the special symbols, which are associated with different variation times. Then, the special figure variation pattern specification command specifies one of n types of variation pattern types (variation pattern number) ("variation pattern n").
The special figure variation mode specification command and the special figure variation pattern specification command are transmitted at the start of the special symbol variation display.

The special figure stop designation command is a command that designates the stop display of the special symbols. The special figure stop specification command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol stop display. Here, the special figure stop specification command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information).
The general pattern type specification command is a command that specifies the type of the stop pattern of the normal pattern ("per pattern per normal pattern 1" to "per pattern per normal pattern 3"). The general pattern type designation command is normally transmitted at the start of the fluctuation display in the design.
Normal figure fluctuation pattern designation command is a command which designates the classification (variation pattern number) of the fluctuation pattern in the normal design. Ordinary figure fluctuation pattern specification command specifies the fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation pattern number by specifying the fluctuation pattern number.
Normal figure stop designation command is a command which designates the stop display in the normal design. The general pattern stop designation command is transmitted at the start of the normal pattern stop display.
The game state designation command is a command for designating a game state (game state offset value). Here, the "game state offset value" is information specifying the game state. In this embodiment, as the gaming state offset value, a numerical value corresponding to each combination of the value of the time saving control flag, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag, and the value of the rotation counter after the big hit is set. The game state designation command designates one game state offset value. The game state designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when changing the special game phase, which will be described later, or the like.

Special figure reservation number specification command is a command to specify the number of reservations of the first special symbol. In this embodiment, the special figure reservation number designation command specifies that the special figure 1 reservation number has increased by "1", the special figure 1 reservation number has decreased by "1", the special figure 1 reservation number, and the like.
Here, the "special figure 1 pending number" refers to the number of notice display (fluctuation display and stop display) of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device is reserved. In other words, the special figure 1 pending number refers to the number of special figure 1 game information that the starting determination is pending.
The special figure pending number specification command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when the game information is stored, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, and the like.
Ordinary figure reservation number specification command is a command that normally specifies the number of reservations in the design. In this embodiment, the special figure reservation number designation command specifies that the number of general figure reservations has increased by "1", that the number of general figure reservations has decreased by "1", the number of general figure reservations, and the like.
Here, the "normal number of pending" refers to the number of times the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the normal symbol in the normal display device is suspended. In other words, the normal pattern pending number refers to the number of normal pattern game information that the normal pattern hit and drop determination is suspended.
Normal figure reservation number designation command is transmitted at the time of power-on, at the time of storage of game information, at the time of starting variable display of normal symbols, and the like.

The opening designation command is a command that designates the start of the opening period (the start of the small winning game state or the big winning game state). The opening designation command is the type of the small winning game state or the big winning game state to start (type of stop pattern (specifically, "small winning pattern 1" to "small winning pattern 6" and "big winning pattern 1" to "big winning Designate any type)) among the symbols 8”. The opening designation command is transmitted at the start of the opening period (at the start of the small winning game state or the big winning game state).
The round start designation command is a command for designating the start of a round (small winning game or round game). The round start specification command is transmitted at the start of the round (small winning game or round game).
The round end designation command is a command for designating the end of the round (small winning game or round game). The round end designation command is transmitted at the end of the round (small winning game or round game).
The ending designation command is a command that designates the start of the ending period. The ending specifying command is sent at the beginning of the ending period.
The V winning designation command is a command for designating detection of passage of the game ball through the V area. The V winning designation command is transmitted when the passing of the game ball through the V area is detected.

The first look-ahead designation command is the type of stop design of the special design ("lost design", "big hit design 1" to "big hit design 8" and "small hit design 1" to "small hit design 6". type). Here, the first prefetch designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information).
The second look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the contents of the special symbol variation mode. Specifically, the second look-ahead specifying command is that the type of the variation mode is undefined ("undefined value"), or one of m types of variation modes (variation mode number) ("variation mode m" ). The second prefetch designation command is transmitted when game information is stored.
The third look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the contents of the variation pattern of the special symbol. Specifically, the third prefetch designation command is that the type of variation pattern is undefined ("undefined value"), or one of n types of variation patterns (variation pattern number) ("variation pattern n" ). The third prefetch designation command is transmitted when game information is stored.

The error designation command is a command that designates the occurrence of various errors. In this embodiment, the error designation command designates occurrence of vibration error, magnetic error, radio wave error, or right-handed hitting error. The error designation command is sent when the occurrence of various errors is detected.
The demonstration designation command is a command that designates the start of the customer waiting state. The demonstration designation command is sent at the start of the customer waiting state.
The setting value designation command is a command for designating the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 . The setting value designation command is transmitted when the RAM is cleared, when the power is restored after the power is turned on, when the setting change state ends, or when the setting confirmation state ends.

The main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is bidirectional. Each control command transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 consists of 1-byte data.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command to the payout control board 400 by serial communication. In the payout control board 400, when a control command is received from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing. Also, the payout control board 400 transmits a control command to the main control board 200 by serial communication. In the main control board 200, when a control command is received from the payout control board 400, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, as a control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the payout control board 400, a command for designating the number of winning balls and the like are set.
The prize number designation command is a command for designating the number of prize balls to be paid out. In this embodiment, the number-of-prizing-balls designation command designates the payout of n (n=1 to 15) prize balls. The prize ball number designation command is transmitted when the payout control board 400 executes the prize ball payout operation.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200 include the occurrence/cancellation of an error during payout, the occurrence/cancellation of a full tank error, the occurrence/cancellation of a jammed ball error, and the like. A control command specifying each is set. Each control command is sent upon detection of occurrence/release of various errors.

(Processing executed by main control board 200)
Next, processing executed by the main control board 200 will be described.
First, the functions of the hardware configured on the main control board 200 will be described.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the random number generation circuit 203 starts the hardware random number update process.
In the hard random number update process, each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202 (every 0.083 [μs] in this embodiment), the values of the first to third loop counters are changed within a predetermined range. (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) is updated by "1".
Further, in the hardware random number update process, every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (every 2.666 [μs] in this embodiment), the value of the fourth loop counter falls within a predetermined range (this In the embodiment, it is updated by "1" in the range of 0 to 10006).
Then, the winning random number of the normal symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the second special symbol lottery, and the ready-to-win group random number are respectively updated by the hardware random number updating process. The hardware random number update process is executed as a function of the random number generation circuit 203 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the transmission shift registers of the command output ports 1 and 2 transmit the control commands stored in the FIFO buffers to the performance control board 300 or the payout control board 400. Start control command transmission processing. The control command transmission process is executed as a function of the command output ports 1 and 2 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

Next, game control processing executed by the CPU 210 of the main control board 200 based on the program (software) stored in the ROM 220 will be described.
(CPU initialization processing)
First, CPU initialization processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing CPU initialization processing.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 210 starts the CPU initialization process shown in FIG. The CPU initialization process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the CPU initialization processing is processing based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .

When the CPU initialization process is started, first, the process moves to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, an initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, a startup program is read from the ROM 220, and settings necessary for executing various processes such as register settings are performed.
In the initial setting process, the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208, and the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 are read.

Specifically, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the RAM clear switch 207 is read two times, and the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on based on the reading result of the two times. is occurring. Then, the determination result is stored as switch information for the RAM clear switch 207 . At this time, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, a value (“1” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has occurred is stored as the switch information, and the ON state has occurred. If it is determined that the switch has not occurred, a value (“0” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has not occurred is saved as the switch information.

Also, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the setting key switch 208 is read two [times], and based on the reading result of the two [times], the ON state is generated for the setting key switch 208. Determine whether or not Then, the determination result is saved as switch information of the setting key switch 208 . At this time, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, a value (“1” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has occurred is stored as the switch information, and the ON state has occurred. If it is determined that the switch has not occurred, a value (“0” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has not occurred is saved as the switch information.

Furthermore, the value set in the receiving storage area corresponding to the inner frame open sensor 108 is read 2 [times], and based on the result of reading 2 [times], the inner frame open sensor 108 is turned on. is occurring. When it is determined that the ON state has not occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value (“0” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has not occurred. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is not rewritten.

In step S1-2, wait processing time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time (3.1 [s] in this embodiment) is set in the timer counter. As a result, measurement of the set wait processing time by the timer counter is started.
In step S1-3, it is determined whether or not the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has elapsed, and if it is determined that the wait processing time has elapsed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-4, If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the processing of step S1-3 is repeated.
In step S1-4, RAM access permission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-5. In the RAM access permission process, necessary processes are executed to permit access to the work area of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to access permission is stored as a RAM protection value in the RAM access protection area of the RAM 230 . As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is permitted.

At step S1-5, a gaming machine state flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the gaming machine status flag is acquired.
Specifically, in the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is saved (loaded) in the D register.
At step S1-6, it is determined whether or not the backup valid flag is normal. If it is determined that it is not (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, when the value (backup valid flag) stored in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230 is a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal, and the value stored in the backup valid flag area is not a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is not normal.

In step S1-7, checksum calculation processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-8. In the checksum calculation process, a checksum is calculated based on the backup information.
Specifically, in the checksum calculation process, first, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the use area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
Next, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-use area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
In step S1-8, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S1-7 is normal, and if it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-9, If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, "the checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "step S1 The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in -7 must match the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area." Judge that the checksum is normal.
On the other hand, "the checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "step S1- The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in step 7 matches the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area." If not, it is determined that the checksum is not normal.

In step S1-9, a clear target area setting process at power-on is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-10. In the power-on clear target area setting process, as a range to clear (initialize) the use area M1 of the RAM 230, areas other than the setting value area and the gaming machine state flag area (specifically, the checksum area, Backup valid flag area, error related area, normal game related area 1, normal game related area 2, and stack area) are set.
At step S1-10, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on. If it is determined that the ON state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-21.
Here, based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 saved in step S1-1, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on. At this time, if a value indicating that an ON state has occurred is stored as switch information, it is determined that an ON state has occurred, and a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is stored. If so, it is determined that the ON state has not occurred.

In step S1-11, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-12, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register, it is determined whether or not the game ready state has occurred. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred. It is determined that no possible state has occurred.

In step S1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-13, and the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
The "setting confirmation condition" is that a game ready state has occurred, the RAM clear switch 207 has not been turned on, the setting key switch 208 has been turned on, and This is established when the frame open sensor 108 is in the ON state.
Here, in step S1-1, if the inner frame open sensor 108 is not turned on, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that it is not turned on. As a result, when both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 are in the on state, a value indicating that the setting key switch 208 is in the on state is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. . On the other hand, if at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 is not turned on, a value indicating that the setting key switch 208 is not turned on is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. be done.
Therefore, in step 1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. At this time, if a value indicating that an ON state has occurred is stored as switch information, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, and a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is stored. If so, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied.

In step S1-13, a setting confirmation state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the setting confirmation state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting value confirmation state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-14, a process for setting an area to be cleared upon power return is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the clear target area setting process at the time of power return, as the range to clear (initialize) the use area M1 of the RAM 230, the set value area, the gaming machine state flag area, the normal game related area 2, and other areas excluding the stack area Areas (specifically, checksum area, backup valid flag area, error-related area, and normal game-related area 1) are set.

In step S1-15, an initialization process at the time of power return is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-16. In the power recovery initialization process, the range set in step S1-14 is cleared (initialized) in the use area M1 of the RAM 230. FIG.
In step S1-16, a subcommand transmission process at power return is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-17. In the power recovery subcommand transmission process, a subcommand specifying recovery from power interruption (hereinafter referred to as a “power failure recovery designation command”) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 . Here, the power failure restoration designation command designates the timing at which power interruption occurs (timing at which power is restored). For example, when the power is cut off during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, in the power failure recovery designation command, the power cutoff timing (timing to restore the power supply) is specified during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. be done. On the other hand, when the interruption of the power supply occurs during the occurrence of the small winning game state, in the power failure recovery designation command, the timing of the interruption of the power supply (timing to restore the power supply) is set during the occurrence of the small winning game state is specified.
In step S1-17, a payout command transmission process at power return is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process at the time of power recovery, a payout command designating recovery from power shutdown is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S1-18, a backup abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-19. In the backup abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the backup abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-19, a non-use area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-20. In the non-use area read/write check process, the non-use area M2 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and a read/write check is performed.
In step S1-20, a process for setting an area to be cleared in the event of an abnormality is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-21. In the abnormality clear target area setting process, all areas (specifically, the setting value area, the gaming machine status flag area, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, error-related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area).

In step S1-21, a used area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-22. In the used area read/write check process, the range set in step S1-20 in the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and read/write check is performed.
Specifically, in the used area read/write check process, of the used area M1 of the RAM 230, all areas (specifically, the set value area, gaming machine status flag area, checksum area, backup valid flag area, error related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area) are cleared (initialized).
Thereby, a predetermined initial value is set as the value of each counter for the special figure 1 display pattern counter, the special figure 2 display pattern counter, and the normal figure display pattern counter.

In step S1-22, it is determined whether or not the result of the read/write check performed in steps S1-19 and S1-21 is normal. If it is determined that the result of the read/write check is not normal (No), , the process proceeds to step S1-23, and when it is determined that the result of the read/write check is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-24.
In step S1-23, RAM abnormality setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the RAM abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the RAM abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-24, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-25, and the setting is performed. If it is determined that the confirmation state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-26.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred. Determine that no confirmation condition has occurred.
At step S1-25, a playable state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-26. In the playable state setting process, a value corresponding to the playable state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.

In step S1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied.If it is determined that the setting change condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-27, and the setting change condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the condition is not established (No), the process proceeds to step S1-28.
The "setting change condition" is that the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on, the setting key switch 208 is turned on, and the inner frame open sensor 108 is turned on. holds when
Here, as described above, when both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 are in the ON state, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 indicates that the ON state has occurred. Value is saved. On the other hand, if at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 is not turned on, a value indicating that the setting key switch 208 is not turned on is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. be done.
Therefore, in step 1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. .
At this time, if both the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 store a value indicating that the ON state has occurred, the setting change condition is satisfied. I judge. On the other hand, if at least one of the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 stores a value indicating that the ON state has not occurred, the setting change condition is established. determine that it is not.

In step S1-27, a setting change state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the setting change state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting change state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
At step S1-28, a gaming machine state flag saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-29. In the gaming machine status flag saving process, the gaming machine status flag set in the D register is saved in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 .
At step S1-29, a RAM clear subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-30. In the RAM clearing subcommand transmission process, a subcommand designating that RAM clearing has been executed (hereinafter referred to as a “RAM clearing designation command”) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

At step S1-30, the RAM clear initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-31. In the RAM clear initialization process, the RAM 230 is initialized. In the RAM clear initialization process, the range set in step S1-9 in the use area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
Specifically, in the RAM clearing initialization process, other areas (specifically, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the Error-related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area) are cleared (initialized).
Thereby, a predetermined initial value is set as the value of each counter for the special figure 1 display pattern counter, the special figure 2 display pattern counter, and the normal figure display pattern counter.
Also, a predetermined initial value ("600" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the free time counter. Also, a left-handed period (left-handed state) is set. Furthermore, in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, "0" is set, and "0" is set as the value of each time saving counter (first time saving counter, second time saving counter, third time saving counter).
In step S1-31, a payout command transmission process when RAM is cleared is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process at the time of RAM clearing, a payout command specifying that the RAM clearing has been executed is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S1-32, a subcommand setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-33. In the subcommand setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command designating the current gaming machine state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the sub-command setting process, a sub-command output request of the RAM 230 outputs a power-on gaming machine state specifying command that specifies the gaming machine state flag (gaming machine state) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 . Store in buffer.
In step S1-33, a subcommand group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-34. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230 .
Here, in the subcommand group, a subcommand specifying the power recovery phase, a subcommand specifying the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand specifying the firing position, and a stop symbol of the first special symbol are specified. Subcommand to specify the stop symbol of the second special symbol, subcommand to specify the special figure 1 reserved number, subcommand to specify the special figure 2 reserved number, subcommand to specify the value of the time saving counter, RAM230 subcommands for designating the setting values stored in the setting value area of .

At step S1-34, an initial display time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-35. In the initial display time setting process, the initial display time of the performance display device 206 is set in the initial display timer.
At step S1-35, an interrupt setting process is executed, and the main loop process (step S2-1) is performed. In the interrupt setting process, initial setting of a CTC (counter/timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is performed.
Specifically, in the interrupt setting process, an interrupt vector register is set, and an interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment) is set in the CTC.

(main loop processing)
Next, main loop processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing main loop processing.
After completing the CPU initialization process (step S1-35) shown in FIG. 8, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in FIG. The main loop processing is processing based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop processing is processing based on the program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .
When the main loop process is started, first, the process moves to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-2. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state is set to prohibit interrupts of other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S2-2, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
Here, "initial value random number" refers to the initial value and end value of soft random numbers (per pattern random numbers, reach mode random numbers, special pattern fluctuation pattern random numbers, general pattern fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc.) that are random numbers generated on the program. A random number to decide.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates soft random numbers is updated within a preset range from the initial value to the end value. The initial value and end value of the loop counter that generates soft random numbers are changed each time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

At step S2-3, main command analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, the main command received from the payout control board 400 (control command transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200) is analyzed, and a process according to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, subcommand transmission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of the output port 205 (command output port 1).
As a result, the subcommand input to the transmission data register is stored (stored) in the FIFO buffer. Then, the subcommands stored in the FIFO buffer are transmitted to the effect control board 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
At step S2-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt permission processing, the interrupt disabled state is canceled. As a result, during the period from the execution of the interrupt permission process of step S2-5 to the execution of the interrupt prohibition process of step S2-1, the execution of the saving process at power shutdown, the timer interrupt process, etc. is permitted. This is the interrupt enabled period.
In step S2-6, another random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In the other random number update process, the soft random numbers excluding the hit pattern random numbers (specifically, reach mode random numbers, special pattern fluctuation pattern random numbers, general pattern fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

(Save processing when power is cut off)
Next, the power-off save process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the saving process at power-off.
The main control board 200 includes a power interruption detection circuit (not shown). The power cutoff detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 600 and outputs a power cutoff warning signal to the input port 204 when the value of the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value.
When the CPU 210 receives the power-off notice signal, the CPU 210 starts the power-off saving process shown in FIG. 10 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop process. The power-off save process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the saving process at power-off is a process based on the program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .
When the power-off saving process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register saving process, the values of the registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved in the saving area of the RAM 230 .
In step S3-2, power-off notice signal read processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power cut-off notice signal reading process, the power cut-off notice signal is read from the power cut-off detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power-off notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power-off notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-3, based on the value read in step S3-2 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cut-off notice signal), whether the power cut-off notice signal is input from the power cut-off detection circuit. If it is determined that the power cut-off notice signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4, and if it is determined that the power cut-off notice signal has not been input (No), goes to step S3-13.

In step S3-4, output port stop processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5. In the output port stop processing, output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) is stopped.
Specifically, in the output port stop processing, the values of all bits included in the port registers of the output ports 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) are initialized. This stops the output of control signals and control commands from the output ports 205 (output port 0 to output port 4).
In step S3-5, a backup effective flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the backup valid flag setting process, a predetermined valid value is stored (saved) in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230 .

In step S3-6, checksum storage processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the checksum storage process, a checksum is calculated and stored.
Specifically, in the checksum storage process, first, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the use area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 . Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230 .
Next, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230. FIG. Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum area.
In step S3-7, RAM access prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the RAM access prohibition processing, processing for prohibiting access to the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to access prohibition is stored as a RAM protect value in the RAM access protect area of the RAM 230 . As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

At step S3-8, a loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of power-off notice signal reading times is set as the value of the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-9, power-off notice signal reading processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the power cut-off notice signal reading process, the power cut-off notice signal is read from the power cut-off detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power-off notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power-off notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-10, based on the value read in step S3-9 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cut-off notice signal), whether the power cut-off notice signal is input from the power cut-off detection circuit. If it is determined that the power cut-off notice signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-11, and if it is determined that the power cut-off notice signal has been input (Yes). goes to step S3-8.

In step S3-11, loop counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-12. In the loop counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-12, it is determined whether or not the value of the return determination loop counter is "0". If it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is "0" (Yes), the CPU When it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S3-9.
In step S3-13, a register return process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the original process is returned to. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S3-1 is restored. After the register return processing is completed, the program returns to the main loop processing (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Timer interrupt processing)
Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.
The clock generation circuit 202 generates an interrupt request signal every predetermined interrupt cycle (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment).
In response to the generation of the interrupt request signal, the CPU 210 starts timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 11 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop processing. The main loop processing is processing based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop processing is processing based on the program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .
When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the process moves to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved in the save area of the RAM 230 .
In step S4-2, interrupt permission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt permission processing, interrupts are permitted.

In step S4-3, dynamic port output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4. Dynamic port output processing will be described later.
In step S4-4, port input processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. The port input process acquires the state of each switch/sensor.
The RAM 230 is provided with an ON state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3).
In the port input process, it is determined whether or not each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3) is turned on. Here, the "on state" refers to a state in which the state in which the detection signal is not input (low level) changes to the state in which the detection signal is input (high level). At this time, based on the information set in the reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor, it is determined whether or not the switch/sensor is in the ON state.
When it is determined that each switch/sensor is in the ON state, "1" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state has not occurred for each switch/sensor, "0" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor.
In the following description, the value stored in the ON state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor is referred to as the "switch bit data" of the switch/sensor.

At step S4-5, a gaming machine state flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
In step S4-6, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-7, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-9.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag acquired in step S4-5, it is determined whether or not the game ready state has occurred. At this time, when the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state is generated, and when the acquired gaming machine state flag is not a value corresponding to the playable state, the gameable state is generated. determine that it is not.

In step S4-7, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that an abnormal state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-8, and the abnormal state is If it is determined that it has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-19.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag acquired in step S4-5, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred. At this time, if the obtained gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to any one of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred. If the obtained gaming machine state flag does not correspond to any one of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that the abnormal state has not occurred.

In step S4-8, setting-related processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. The setting-related processing will be described later.
In step S4-9, timer update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the timer update process, various timers are updated.
Specifically, in the timer update process, the value of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, security timer, etc.) is updated.
In step S4-10, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. The initial value random number update process in step S4-10 is the same process as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2.
Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-11, a hit symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the winning symbol random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the winning symbol random number among the soft random numbers is updated.
In step S4-12, switch management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the switch management processing, processing (acquisition of various random numbers, etc.) is executed according to the state of each switch 101, 102, 104, 110 (whether or not the ON state is detected). The switch management processing will be described later.

At step S4-13, a special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the special game management process, the operation of the special figure display device (the special figure 1 display device and the special figure 2 display device) and the operation of the special electric accessory 55a are managed. Special game management processing will be described later.
In step S4-14, normal game management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. The normal game management process manages the operation of the normal diagram display device and the operation of the normal electric accessory 52a. The normal game management process will be described later.
At step S4-15, a state management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. In the state management process, various errors (abnormal states) are determined, and settings are made according to the determination result.

At step S4-16, a winning opening switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the prize-winning switch process, processes (such as updating various counters) are executed according to the states of the switches 101, 102, 103, 105, and 106 (whether or not the ON state is detected).
In this embodiment, as prize ball control counters, a prize ball control counter 1 that stores the number of ball game balls that have entered the big prize hole 55 and the number of ball game balls that have entered the left other prize hole 57a to 57c are stored. A prize ball control counter 2 to be stored, a prize ball control counter 3 to store the number of ball game balls entering the right other prize opening 56, and the number of ball game balls entering the first starting hole 51 are stored. and a prize ball control counter 5 in which the number of ball game balls entering the second starting port 52 is stored.
In the winning hole switch process, it is determined whether or not the ON state is detected for each of the switches 101, 102, 103, 105, and 106, and if it is determined that the ON state is detected, a prize ball control counter corresponding to the switch is set. Add "1" to the values from 1 to 5.

At step S4-17, a payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-16, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
Specifically, in the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is equal to or greater than "1", a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (11 [balls] in this embodiment) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . Thereafter, when the game ball payout device 440 completes the payout of the prize balls, the payout control board 400 transmits a main command designating the completion of the payout to the main control board 200 . Then, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1 in accordance with the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is equal to or greater than "1", a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (4 [balls] in this embodiment) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is equal to or greater than "1", it generates a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (4 [balls] in this embodiment) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in accordance with the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is equal to or greater than "1", it generates a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1 [ball]) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is equal to or greater than "1", it generates a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (1 [ball] in this embodiment) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 5 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.

In step S4-18, a firing position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the firing position designation management process, processing related to designation of the firing position is executed.
Specifically, in the launch position designation management process, when the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the left path (left hitting period) to the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the right path (right hitting period) (At the start of the small winning game state or the big winning game state, etc.), "1" is set in the shooting position specification flag area of the RAM 230, and a sub command specifying launching of the game ball to the right path is sent to the sub of the RAM 230. Store in the command output request buffer. As a result, a subcommand designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is transmitted to the effect control board 300 .
On the other hand, when the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the right path (right-handed period) is changed to the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the left-hand path (left-handed period), the shooting position specification flag area of the RAM 230 Set "0".

At step S4-19, an external information management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. In the external information management process, external information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer (or data display device) is set.
In this embodiment, the external information output from the pachinko machine 1 to an external device (an electronic device such as a hall computer, a data display device, etc.) includes information on the number of pattern determinations, starting gate information, jackpot information, security information, and an out gate. Payout number information, error occurrence information, etc. are defined.
"Design fixed number of times information" is external information about the number of executions of special design lottery (variation display / stop display of special design) and the number of execution times of normal design lottery (variation display / stop display of normal design). there is The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the number of symbol determination times information to the hall computer every time the variable display of the first special symbol ends (every time the stop display of the first special symbol starts) while the normal state is occurring. (or data display device). In addition, each time the variable display of the normal pattern started during the occurrence of the time saving state (time saving state 1 to time saving state 3) is completed (every time the stop display of the normal pattern is started), it corresponds to the pattern confirmation number information output an external signal to the hall computer (or data display device).
The “starting opening information” is external information regarding the entry of game balls into the starting openings 51 and 52 . The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the starting port information to the hall computer (or data display device) each time the ON state of the detection signal input from the starting port switches 101 and 102 is detected.
The "jackpot information" is external information about the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state. The main control board 200 outputs an external signal corresponding to the jackpot information to the hall computer (or data display device) each time a jackpot game state is generated.
The "outlet payout information" is external information regarding the number of game balls ejected from the ejection path (or the number of game balls ejected from the outlet 58). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the information on the number of out-putting balls to the hall computer each time the value of the out-ball number counter for external information reaches a predetermined value.
"Security information" is external information indicating that a setting change state is occurring, a setting confirmation state is occurring, or various errors (abnormalities) are occurring. CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the security information to the hole computer when the value of the security timer is "1" or more.

In the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information determination number counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the external information fixed number counter has reached a predetermined value, the pattern fixed number information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . After that, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information fixed number counter. As a result, pattern determination frequency information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information starting entrance ball entry count counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [time] in the present embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the external information starting hole entry number counter has reached a predetermined value, the starting hole information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . After that, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is subtracted from the value of the external information starting entrance number counter. As a result, starting point information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information jackpot frequency counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the external information jackpot frequency counter has reached a predetermined value, the jackpot information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . Thereafter, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information jackpot number counter. As a result, jackpot information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
In the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information out-ball number counter has reached a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the external information out ball number counter has reached a predetermined value, the out outlet payout information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . Thereafter, a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information out-ball number counter. As a result, out-port payout information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Also, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to the game ready status.
Then, it is determined that the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is not a value corresponding to the game ready state (setting change state, setting confirmation state, setting error state, RAM error state, or backup error state). value), the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hole computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the security timer is "1" or more. When it is determined that the value of the security timer is "1" or more, the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. FIG. As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hole computer.

At step S4-20, an LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-21. In the LED display setting process, display data to be output to the main display device 60 or the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with a common 0 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 1 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 2 output request buffer (8 bits), and a common 3 output request buffer (8 bits). It is
In the LED display setting process, first, the common 2 output request buffer is cleared (initialized), and the common 3 output request buffer is cleared (initialized). Specifically, each bit value of the common 2 output request buffer is set to "0", and each bit value of the common 3 output request buffer is set to "0".
Next, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Then, when the obtained gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to the game ready state, the normal display data setting process described later is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to the setting change state, a display data setting process at the time of setting change, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag has a value corresponding to the setting confirmation state, a display data setting process at the time of setting confirmation, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state), an abnormality display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed.

In the normal display data setting process, first, the value of the special figure 1 display pattern counter is obtained, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 display pattern counter obtained is transferred to the common 0 output request buffer. set.
As a result, the first special symbol is displayed by the LED1 to LED8 among the light emitting elements forming the main display device 60. FIG.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 display pattern counter is acquired, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the value of the acquired special figure 2 display pattern counter is set in the common 1 output request buffer.
As a result, the second special symbol is displayed by the LEDs 9 to 16 among the light emitting elements forming the main display device 60 .
Next, the value of the general-purpose map display symbol counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value of the general-purpose map display symbol counter is set as the output data a.

Next, the values set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning of the RAM 230 are "pre-open state of the first large winning opening", "control state of opening the first large winning opening", and "effective closing of the first large winning opening". state", "waiting state for completion of opening of the first large prize-winning opening", "state before opening the second large-winning It is determined whether or not the value designates one of the special game phases out of "2 big prize opening end wait states".
Then, the value set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning is "state before opening the first big winning prize", "control state for opening the first big winning prize", "effective state of closing the first big winning prize", ``Wait state for ending the opening of the 1st major winning prize'', ``Pre-opening state of the 2nd major winning prize'', ``Control state of opening the 2nd major winning prize'', ``Closed effective state of the 2nd major winning prize'' and ``Second prize winning When it is determined that the value designates one of the special game phases in the mouth open end wait state, the value set in the special symbol determination flag area of the RAM 230 (the value corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol) Display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as output data b.
On the other hand, the values set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning are the "state before opening the first large winning opening", "control state for opening the first large winning opening", "valid state for closing the first large winning opening", ``Wait state for ending the opening of the 1st major winning prize'', ``Pre-opening state of the 2nd major winning prize'', ``Control state of opening the 2nd major winning prize'', ``Closed effective state of the 2nd major winning prize'' and ``Second prize winning When it is determined that it is not a value specifying any of the special game phases in the mouth open end wait state, the output data b is not set.

Next, the value set in the firing position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data c.
Next, the display data (8 bits) obtained by ORing the output data a to output data c is set in the common 2 output request buffer.
As a result, the normal symbols are displayed by the LEDs 17 and 18 among the light-emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, and the number of round games executed during the big win game state by the LEDs 19 to 23 (type of the big win game state). is displayed, and the LED 24 displays the path (left path or right path) along which the game ball should be launched.
Next, the value of the special figure 1 pending number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data d.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data e.
Next, the value of the normal figure reservation number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data f.

Next, it is determined whether or not the power supply is restored.
And when it determines with it being the power return time, the value set to the time saving control flag area|region is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value are set as the output data g.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the power is not restored, the output data g is not set.
Next, the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data h.
Next, display data (8 bits) obtained by ORing output data d to output data h is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light-emitting elements that constitute the main display device 60, LEDs 25 and 26 display the number of reserved special figures 1, LEDs 27 and 28 display the number of reserved special figures 2, and LEDs 29 and 30 display the number of reserved special figures. The number of reservations is displayed, the game state at the time of power return (executing or stopping the time saving control) is displayed by the LED 31, and the current game state (executing or stopping the time saving control) is displayed by the LED 32. .

In the setting change display data setting process, information indicating that the setting change state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and the settings stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are set. Information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and "-" is set. is set in the common 2 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the LEDs 33 to 40 display the character "r", the LEDs 41 to 48 display the character "n.", and the LEDs 49 to 56 display the character "-" is displayed, and the LEDs 57 to 64 display numbers indicating the set values.

In the setting confirmation display data setting process, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and the setting stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 is set. Information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data of "r" (8 bits) is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data of "n." (8 bits) is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the RAM 230 is set. The display data corresponding to the set value stored in the value area is set in the common 3 output request buffer. No display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (clear value remains).
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the LEDs 33 to 40 display the character "r", the LEDs 41 to 48 display the character "n." A number indicating the value is displayed. Note that the LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

In the abnormal display data setting process, information indicating that an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer. At the same time, an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data of "E" (8 bits) is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data of "r." (8 bits) is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and Display data (error code) corresponding to the state (setting error state, RAM error state, or backup error state) is set in the common 3 output request buffer. No display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (clear value remains).
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "E", the LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "r." A number representing the code is displayed. Note that the LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

At step S4-21, a solenoid data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-22. In the solenoid data setting process, control data (driving data) to be output to each solenoid 64 , 65 , 66 is stored (set) in the port output request buffer of RAM 230 .
In step S4-22, port output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-23. In port output processing, various signals are output to the hall computer, solenoids 64, 65, 66, and the like.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signal, control signal, etc.) set in the port output request buffer is output to the output ports 205 (output port 2, output port 3). As a result, the external signal set in the port output request buffer is output to the hall computer. Further, each solenoid 64, 65, 66 is driven and controlled based on the drive signal set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-23, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-24. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state is set to prohibit interrupts of other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.

In step S4-24, test signal output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-25. In the test signal output process, test information (test signal) is set.
The test signal output process is a process based on a program for executing a test-related process defined by gaming machine regulations. That is, the test signal output processing is processing based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220 . The test signal tube is invoked during execution of timer interrupt processing.
Specifically, in the test signal output process, test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (game state, left-handed period, right-handed period) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
In step S4-25, performance display device control processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-26. The performance display device control processing will be described later.
In step S4-26, register return processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the original processing is returned to. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S4-1 is restored. After the register return processing is completed, the program returns to the main loop processing (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Dynamic port output processing)
Next, the dynamic port output processing in step S4-3 will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing dynamic port output processing.
When the dynamic port output process is executed in step S4-3, as shown in FIG. 12, the process first proceeds to step S29-1.
In step S29-1, output data clear processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-2. In the output data clear process, the A register is cleared (initialized). Specifically, "0" is set as each bit value of the A register.
In step S29-2, main display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-3. In the main display device data output process, the value of the A register (value cleared in step S29-1) is output to output port 0. FIG. As a result, the output port 0 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the main display device 60 becomes low level.
In step S29-3, performance display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-4. In the performance display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to the output port 4. FIG. As a result, the output port 4 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the performance display device 206 becomes low level.

In step S29-4, common selection processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-5. In the common selection process, the value of the common counter is updated.
Specifically, in the common selection process, it is determined whether or not the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit (“3” in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the common counter has not reached the upper limit value, "1" is added to the value of the common counter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of the common counter.
In step S29-5, common output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-6. In common output processing, output data corresponding to the value of the common counter is output to output port 1 .
Specifically, in the common output process, when the value of the common counter is "0", the output data is output with "COM0" set to high level and "COM1", "COM2", and "COM3" set to low level. Output to port 1. As a result, "COM0" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, output data is output to the output port 1 with “COM1” set to high level and “COM0”, “COM2”, and “COM3” set to low level. As a result, "COM1" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, output data is output to the output port 1 with “COM2” set to high level and “COM0”, “COM1”, and “COM3” set to low level. As a result, "COM2" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, output data is output to the output port 1 with “COM3” set to high level and “COM0”, “COM1” and “COM2” set to low level. As a result, "COM3" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".

In step S29-6, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S29-7, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S29-11.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not the game ready status has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred. It is determined that no possible state has occurred.

In step S29-7, main display device data acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-8. In the main display device data acquisition process, display data for the main display device 60 is acquired and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the main display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, among the common 0 to common 3 output request buffers of the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. set.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the main display device data acquisition process is the common The display data are set in the 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer.

In step S29-8, main display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-9. In the main display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-7 is output to output port 0. FIG.
As a result, the data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver. 250a.
That is, the display on the main display device 60 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer).

In step S29-9, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-10. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state is set to prohibit interrupts of other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S29-10, performance display device output processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-4) is performed. Performance display device output processing will be described later.

In step S29-11, performance display device data acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-12. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, among the common 0 to common 3 output request buffers of the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. set.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the LED display setting process of step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process (specifically, the display data setting process at the time of setting change, setting confirmation In the time display data setting process or the abnormal time display data setting process), it becomes the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer.

In step S29-12, performance display device data output processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-4) is performed. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-11 is output to the output port 4. FIG.
As a result, the data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver. 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer).

(Performance display device output processing)
Next, the performance display device output process in step S29-10 will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing performance display device output processing.
Performance display device output processing is processing based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 . That is, the performance display device output process is a process based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. FIG. Performance display device output processing is called during execution of dynamic port output processing.
When the performance display device output process is called in step S29-10, as shown in FIG. 13, the process first proceeds to step S30-1.
In step S30-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-2. In the register saving process, the values of all the registers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to the saving area of the RAM. Also, the values of all stack pointers used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved in the save area of the RAM.

In step S30-2, performance display device data acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, the display data set in the area corresponding to the value of the confirmed common counter is acquired from the identification segment output request buffer and the ratio segment output request buffer of the RAM 230, and the acquired display data is set in the A register. .
At this time, when the value of the common counter=“0”, the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, the display data set in the high-order 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired by the performance display device data acquisition process is set in the identification segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer in the performance display device control processing of step S4-25 included in the previous timer interrupt processing. displayed data.

In step S30-3, performance display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-4. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S30-2 is output to the output port 4. FIG.
As a result, data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) based on the display data set in the output request buffer (identification segment output request buffer or ratio segment output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (the identification segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer).

In step S30-4, register restoration processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-5. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S30-1 (the value of the register used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) and the The value of the saved stack pointer (the value of the stack pointer used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) is restored.
In step S30-5, interrupt permission processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-4) is performed. In the interrupt permission processing, the interrupt disabled state is released. As a result, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like is permitted.

(Setting-related processing)
Next, the setting-related processing in step S4-8 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing setting-related processing.
When the setting-related process is executed in step S4-8, as shown in FIG. 14, the process first proceeds to step S37-1.
In step S37-1, it is determined whether or not the setting change state has occurred (set). If it is determined that the setting change state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-2, and the setting If it is determined that no change state has occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S37-8.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not the setting change status has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that the setting change state has occurred. Determine that no change state has occurred.

In step S37-2, set value acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the setting value acquisition process, the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are acquired (loaded), and the acquired setting values are stored in the register.
In step S37-3, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-4, and the RAM clear switch is pressed. 207 is not pressed (No), the process proceeds to step S37-5.
If the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed. If the RAM clear switch 207 is not turned on, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed. judge.
In step S37-4, set value update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-5. In the set value update process, "1" is added to the set value stored in the register.

In step S37-5, it is determined whether or not the set value stored in the register is less than a predetermined set comparison value ("6" in this embodiment). is not less than the set comparison value (the set value is equal to or greater than the predetermined set comparison value) (No), the process proceeds to step S37-6, and the set value stored in the register is compared with the predetermined set comparison value. If it is determined to be less than the value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-7.
In step S37-6, set value initialization processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-7. In the setting value initialization process, the setting value stored in the register is overwritten with a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment).
In step S37-7, set value saving processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-8. In the setting value saving process, the setting value stored in the register is saved in the setting value area of the RAM 230 .

In step S37-8, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state. If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in the ON state (is in the OFF state) (No), If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is ON (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-19). .
Here, if the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state. It is determined that it is not.
In step S37-9, a subcommand setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-10. In the subcommand setting process, a setting-related end specifying command (subcommand) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S37-10, subcommand group setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-11. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230 .
Here, the subcommand group includes a subcommand that specifies the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand that specifies the firing position, a subcommand that specifies the stop symbol of the first special symbol, and a stop symbol of the second special symbol. Subcommand to specify the pattern, subcommand to specify the special figure 1 reservation number, subcommand to specify the special figure 2 reservation number, subcommand to specify the value of the time saving counter, setting stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 It includes subcommands that specify values.
At step S37-11, the RAM set process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the next process (step S4-19) is performed. In the RAM set process, a playable state is set as the gaming machine state.
Specifically, a value corresponding to the playable state is stored (saved) as a value (gaming machine state flag) in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 .

(switch management processing)
Next, the switch management processing of step S4-12 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing switch management processing.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-12, as shown in FIG. 15, the process first proceeds to step S5-1.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the gate switch 104 has been detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the gate switch 104 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-2, and the gate switch 104 is detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the switch 104 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-3.
In step S5-2, normal figure starting ball detection processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. Normal figure starting ball detection processing will be described later.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 starting opening switch 101 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting opening switch 101 is detected (Yes), step When the process proceeds to S5-4 and it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-5.
In step S5-4, a special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. The special figure 1 starting ball detection processing will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 starter switch 102 is detected, and if it is determined that the on state of the special figure 2 starter switch 102 is detected (Yes), step When the process proceeds to S5-6 and it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-7.

In step S5-6, a special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-7. The special figure 2 starting ball detection processing will be described later.
In step S5-7, it is determined whether or not the ON state of V-region switch 110 has been detected. If it is determined that the ON state of V-region switch 110 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-8. If it is determined that the ON state of the V-region switch 110 has not been detected (No), the series of processing ends and the next processing (step S4-13) is performed.
In step S5-8, V passage detection processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-13) is performed.
In the V passage detection process, first, it is determined whether or not it is during the V valid period.
Here, the "V effective period" is from the start of the first small winning game executed during the occurrence of any one of the "small winning symbols 1" to "small winning symbols 4", It is a period until the big winning opening closing valid time (interval time) after the end of the first small winning game passes.
Then, when it is determined that it is during the V valid period, "1" is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230, and the V winning designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the V valid period, the process ends.

(normal figure starting ball detection processing)
Next, normal figure starting ball detection processing in step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing normal/normal starting ball detection processing.
When the normal chart starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, as shown in FIG. 16, first, the process proceeds to step S6-1.
In step S6-1, normal figure random number acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the general pattern random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random numbers) such as per random number, general pattern random number, general pattern variation pattern random number, etc. are obtained (loaded) from the loop counter corresponding to each lottery.
In step S6-2, it is determined whether the value of the normal pattern reservation number counter is the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment), and if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern reservation number counter is not the upper limit value (No), the process proceeds to step S6-3, and if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern pending number counter is the upper limit value (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S5- 3).
In step S6-3, normal figure pending number counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the general pattern reservation number counter update process, the value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the general pattern reservation number counter is newly set to the general pattern reservation number counter.

In step S6-4, the general pattern random number storage process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3). In the general pattern random number storage process, the per random number obtained in step S6-1, the general pattern per pattern random number and the general pattern variation pattern random number are stored in the general pattern game information storage area of the RAM 230 as the general pattern game information.
The RAM 230 includes a general game information storage area in which general game information is stored.
The general pattern game information storage area is configured to include a storage area 0 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing general pattern game information.
In the storage area 0, the general pattern game information during execution of the game is stored. On the other hand, in the storage area 1 to storage area 4, general-purpose game information in which the general-purpose hit-lose determination is suspended is stored. The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (higher to lower) in descending order of priority. Then, the normal game information stored in the storage area 1 to the memory area 4, the normal game hit-loss determination is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area with the higher priority.
In addition, in the general pattern random number storage process, a general pattern reservation number designation command that specifies that the general pattern reservation number has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Special figure 1 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process of step S5-4 will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, as shown in FIG. 17, the process first proceeds to step S7-1.
In step S7-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 . In addition, "1" is added to the value of the external information starting entrance ball entry count counter.
In step S7-2, a pending number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the pending number counter address setting process, in the pending number counter address setting area of the RAM 230, the address of the special figure 1 pending number counter is set.
In step S7-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special figure 2 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process of step S5-6 will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, as shown in FIG. 18, the process first proceeds to step S8-1.
In step S8-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 . In addition, "1" is added to the value of the external information starting entrance ball entry count counter.
Also, in the special symbol identification value setting process, it is determined whether or not it is during the period of hitting to the right. Then, if it is determined that the ball is not in the right-handed period (it is in the left-handed period), "1" is added to the value of the right-handed error counter.
In step S8-2, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-7). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special symbol random number acquisition process)
Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process of steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the special symbol random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, as shown in FIG. 19, the process first proceeds to step S9-1.
In step S9-1, a special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, a special random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random numbers) such as jackpot random numbers, winning pattern random numbers, reach group random numbers, reach mode random numbers, special figure fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc. are obtained (loaded) from the loop counter corresponding to each lottery. . At this time, a corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-3, it is determined whether the special symbol identification value is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, and if it is determined that the special symbol identification value is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery ( Yes), the process proceeds to step S9-4, and when it is determined that the special symbol identification value is not a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery) (No) , the process proceeds to step S9-10.
In step S9-4, a special figure 1 reservation number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-5. In the special figure 1 reservation number acquisition process, the special figure 1 reservation number counter specified by the address set in the reservation number counter address area is obtained (loaded).

In step S9-5, it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number acquired in step S9-4 is the upper limit ("4" in this embodiment), and the special figure 1 reservation number is not the upper limit If it is determined (No), the process proceeds to step S9-6, and if it is determined that the special figure 1 reservation number is the upper limit (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S5 -5).
In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the special figure 2 reservation number is set to "0". That is, the second special symbol lottery is configured to have no reserve. However, for the second special symbol lottery, it may be configured to have a hold.
In step S9-6, special figure 1 pending number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special figure 1 reservation number counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter.
In step S9-7, a hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the pending number specification command setting process, a special figure pending number specifying command specifying that the special figure 1 pending number has increased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S9-8, a special random number saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-9. In the special figure random number saving process, various random numbers acquired in step S9-2 are stored in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game Information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area).
The RAM 230 includes a special figure 1 game information storage area in which special figure 1 game information is stored and a special figure 2 game information storage area in which special figure 2 game information is stored.
The special figure 1 game information storage area includes storage area 0 to storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing special figure 1 game information.
In the storage area 0, the special figure 1 game information during execution of the game is stored. On the other hand, the storage area 1 ~ storage area 4, the special figure 1 game information is stored start determination is pending. The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (higher to lower) in descending order of priority. Then, the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 1 to the storage area 4, starting determination is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area with the higher priority.
The special figure 2 game information storage area is configured to include storage area 0 to storage area 1 as a storage area capable of storing special figure 2 game information.
In the storage area 0, the special figure 2 game information during execution of the game is stored. On the other hand, in the storage area 1, the special figure 2 game information before the start determination is executed is stored.

In the special figure random number storage process, if the special symbol identification value obtained in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-2 are used as special figure 1 game information. , is stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-2 are stored in an empty memory area (among the empty memory areas, the memory area with the highest priority) among the memory areas 1 to 4. .
That is, when the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "1", various random numbers obtained in step S9-2 are stored in the storage area 1. On the other hand, when the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "2", various random numbers obtained in step S9-2 are stored in the storage area 2. If the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "3", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-2 are stored in the storage area 3. If the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-2 are stored in the storage area 4.
On the other hand, if the special symbol identification value obtained in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-2 as special figure 2 game information, special figure 2 game Store in the information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-2 are stored in storage area 1. FIG.

In step S9-9, a preliminary determination process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5 or S5-7). In the prior determination process, the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure) saved (stored) in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area) in step S9-8 2 game information) (hereinafter referred to as "pre-determined game information"), various lottery results are pre-determined.
In this embodiment, for all game information (special figure 1 game information and special figure 2 game information), prior determination of various lottery results is performed.
In addition, regarding the game information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, the prior determination of various lottery results may not be performed. In addition, for the special figure 2 game information acquired (stored) during the stop of the time saving control, the pre-determination of various lottery results is not executed, and the special figure 1 game information acquired (stored) during the execution of the time saving control , may be configured such that the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed.

In the prior determination process, first, the prior special figure per determination process is executed.
In the preliminary special figure hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery ("big hit", "small hit" or "loss") is determined (preliminary special figure hit determination).
The ROM 220 stores a special symbol big winning lottery table in which the big winning values of the special symbol lottery are registered and a special symbol small winning lottery table in which the small winning values of the special symbol lottery are registered. Also, as a special figure small winning lottery table, a special figure small winning lottery table corresponding to the special figure 1 game information and a special figure small winning lottery table corresponding to the special figure 2 game information are stored.
In advance special figure hit determination processing, first, advance special figure big hit determination processing is executed.
In advance special figure big hit decision processing, the special figure big hit lottery table is read. Then, based on the big win random number included in the game information to be pre-determined and the read-out special big win lottery table, it is determined whether or not the "big win" is won (preliminary special big win determination).
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the game information subject to preliminary determination matches the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "jackpot" has been won (special pattern lottery). The result is judged as a “jackpot”). On the other hand, when the jackpot random number included in the game information to be pre-determined does not match the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "jackpot" has not been won.

When it is determined that the "big hit" is not won by the preliminary special figure big hit determination process, next, the preliminary special figure small hit determination process is executed.
In the preliminary special figure small hit determination process, the special figure small hit lottery table corresponding to the type of the preliminary determination target game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is read. Then, based on the big hit random number included in the game information to be pre-determined and the read special figure small winning lottery table, it is determined whether or not the "small hit" is won (preliminary special figure small winning determination). .
At this time, if the big hit random number included in the pre-determination target game information matches the small hit value registered in the special small hit lottery table, it is determined that the "small hit" has been won (special The result of the pattern lottery is determined as a "small hit"). On the other hand, when the big hit random number included in the game information to be pre-determined does not match the small hit value registered in the special small prize lottery table, it is determined that the "small hit" has not been won.
When it is determined that the "small hit" is not won by the advance special symbol small hit determination processing, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be "loss".
At this time, as described above, if the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information is the special figure 1 game information, one of the "big hit" and "loss" is determined ("small hit" is determined never).
On the other hand, when the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information is the special figure 2 game information, one of the "big hit" and the "small hit" is determined.

In advance determination processing, next, advance special symbol design determination processing is executed. In the prior special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (preliminary special symbol determination).
In the prior special symbol determination process, when it is determined as "big hit" (winning) by preliminary special symbol determination, the type of "big hit symbol" is determined (preliminary special symbol determination).
The ROM 220 stores a jackpot symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the jackpot symbol random number and the type of "big hit symbol" is registered. Also, as the jackpot symbol lottery tables, a first jackpot pattern lottery table corresponding to the special figure 1 game information and a second jackpot pattern lottery table corresponding to the special figure 2 game information are stored.
In the first big-hit symbol lottery table, "big-hit symbol 1" and "big-hit symbol 2" are registered as types of the "big-hit symbol". On the other hand, in the second jackpot pattern lottery table, "jackpot pattern 3" to "jackpot pattern 8" are registered as types of "jackpot patterns".
Then, in the process of determining the type of "big hit symbol", when the pre-determination target game information is the special figure 1 game information, the first big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read first big winning symbol lottery table, the type of the big winning symbol is determined.
On the other hand, when the pre-determination target game information is the special figure 2 game information, the second big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read second big winning symbol lottery table, the type of the big winning symbol is determined.

On the other hand, in the prior special symbol determination process, when it is determined as "small hit" (winning) by preliminary special symbol determination, the type of "small hit design" is determined (preliminary special symbol determination).
A ROM 220 stores a small winning pattern lottery table in which correspondences between winning pattern random numbers and types of "small winning patterns"("small winning patterns 1" to "small winning patterns 6") are registered.
Then, in the process of determining the type of "small winning design", the small winning design lottery table is read. Then, the type of the small winning symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read small winning symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, in the preliminary special figure design determination process, when it is determined as "lost" (defeated) by the preliminary special figure hit determination, "lost design" is determined as the type of stop design (preliminary special figure design determination).

In the advance determination process, next, a first prefetch designation command setting process is executed.
In the first look-ahead specification command setting process, the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 stores a first look-ahead specification command that specifies the type of the stop symbol determined by the preliminary special symbol design determination.

In advance determination processing, next, advance special figure variation mode determination processing is executed.
In the prior special figure variation mode determination process, a variation mode number (variation mode type) and a variation pattern number (variation pattern type) are determined.
In the pre-special figure variation mode determination process, if it is determined as "big hit" or "small hit" by the pre-special figure hit determination, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and , and a variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) are determined.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be "missing" by the preliminary special figure hit determination, the variation mode number (variation mode type), the variation pattern number (variation pattern type), and the is determined.

In the prior variation pattern determination process at winning, first, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) is determined (prior variation mode determination at winning).
The ROM 220 stores a winning variation mode determination table in which correspondences between reach mode random numbers and variation mode numbers (variation mode types) are registered.
In addition, as a winning fluctuation mode determination table, the reservation type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the game state ("normal state", "time saving state 1", "time saving state 2" or "time saving state 3”) and the type of stop pattern (“big hit pattern 1” to “big hit pattern 8” or “small hit pattern 1” to “small hit pattern 6”). table is stored.
In each winning variation mode determination table, each reach mode random number corresponds to a variation mode number (variation mode type) and a winning variation pattern determination table (information specifying the winning variation pattern determination table). attached. As a result, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the winning variation pattern determination table are simultaneously selected based on each winning variation mode determination table.
In the winning prior variation mode determination, first, the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the current game state ("normal state", "time saving state 1", " Time-saving state 2" or "time-saving state 3") and the type of stop symbol determined by prior special symbol symbol determination are confirmed, and the variation mode determination table at the time of winning corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the winning variation pattern determination table are determined based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read winning variation mode determination table. do.
In the prior variation pattern determination process at winning, next, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined (prior variation pattern determination at winning).
The ROM 220 stores a winning fluctuation pattern determination table in which correspondence between special figure fluctuation pattern random numbers and fluctuation pattern numbers (types of fluctuation patterns) is registered.
Also, a plurality of winning variation pattern determination tables having different contents are stored as the winning variation pattern determination table.
In the winning-time prior variation pattern determination, first, the winning-time variation pattern determination table determined by the winning-time prior variation mode determination is read.
Then, the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) is determined based on the special figure variation pattern random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read winning variation pattern determination table.

In the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of defeat, first, the type (“indefinite value” or “fixed value”) of the reach group random number included in the preliminary determination target game information is determined (preliminary random number type determination).
In this embodiment, "indefinite value" and "fixed value" are defined as the types of reach group random numbers.
"Indefinite value" is, at the time of acquisition (storage) of game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), variation mode number (variation mode type), variation pattern number (variation pattern type), is not determined, and when executing the start determination (steps S11-6, S11-7, S11-10) based on the game information, based on the number of reservations at that time, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and variation The pattern number (variation pattern type) and reach group random number type to be determined.
"Fixed value" is, at the time of acquisition (storage) of game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), a variation mode number (variation mode type), a variation pattern number (variation pattern type), is the type of reach group random number that is determined.
In this embodiment, the value of the reach group random number is updated within the range of "0" to "10006". Among "0" to "10006", "0" to "8499" are set as "indefinite values", and "8500" to "10006" are set as "fixed values".
Therefore, in the pre-random number type determination, if the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information is less than "8500", it is determined as "indefinite value", and if it is "8500" or more, "fixed value ” is determined.

In the preliminary fluctuation pattern judgment process at the time of defeat, if the preliminary random number type judgment is determined to be "indefinite value", the advance reach group judgment, the preliminary fluctuation mode judgment at the time of defeat, and the preliminary fluctuation pattern judgment at the time of defeat, which will be described later, are executed. Proceed to the next process without
On the other hand, if the preliminary random number type determination is "fixed value", preliminary reach group determination, preliminary fluctuation mode determination at the time of failure, and preliminary fluctuation pattern determination at the time of failure are performed.

In prior reach group determination, reach group number (type of reach group) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a reach group determination table in which correspondence between reach group random numbers and reach group numbers (types of reach groups) is registered.
Also, as reach group determination tables, a reach group determination table corresponding to "indefinite value" and a reach group determination table corresponding to "fixed value" are stored.
In the reach group determination table corresponding to the "indefinite value", the reach group number corresponding to the "indefinite value" (hereinafter referred to as "indefinite value reach group") is registered as the reach group number. On the other hand, in the reach group determination table corresponding to the "fixed value", the reach group number corresponding to the "fixed value" (hereinafter referred to as "fixed value reach group") is registered as the reach group number.
In prior reach group determination, the reach group determination table corresponding to the "fixed value" is read. Then, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined based on the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read reach group determination table.

In the prior variation mode determination at the time of failure, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) is determined (prior variation mode determination at the time of failure).
The ROM 220 stores a failure change mode determination table in which correspondence between reach mode random numbers and change mode numbers (variation mode types) is registered.
In addition, as a change mode determination table when losing, the reach group number, the reservation type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the number of reservations, the game state ("normal state", "time saving state 1", "Time saving state 2" or "gaming state 3"), and the change mode determination table at the time of defeat corresponding to each combination is stored.
In each reach fluctuation mode determination table, each reach mode random number corresponds to a fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and a fluctuation pattern judgment table at loss (information specifying the fluctuation pattern judgment table at loss). attached. As a result, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the failure variation pattern determination table are simultaneously selected based on each failure variation mode determination table.
At the time of defeat in the prior fluctuation mode determination, first, the reach group number determined by the prior reach group determination, the holding type of the pre-determination target game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), and the pre-determination target game Check the number of holds corresponding to the hold type of information and the current game state ("normal state", "time saving state 1", "time saving state 2" or "time saving state 3"), and confirm this confirmation result Read out the corresponding change mode determination table at the time of failure.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read fluctuation mode determination table at the time of defeat, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the variation pattern determination table at the time of defeat are determined. do.

In the prior variation pattern determination at the time of failure, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined (prior variation pattern determination at the time of failure).
The ROM 220 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of defeat in which the correspondence between the special figure fluctuation pattern random number and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is registered.
Further, a plurality of failure variation pattern determination tables having mutually different contents are stored as the failure variation pattern determination table.
In the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination at the time of failure, first, the fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of failure determined by the preliminary variation mode determination at the time of failure is read.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the special figure variation pattern random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read-out failure variation pattern determination table.

In the advance determination process, next, second and third look-ahead designation command setting processes are executed.
In the second and third look-ahead specification command setting processing, the second look-ahead specification command that specifies the variation mode number determined by the prior variation mode determination, and the third look-ahead that specifies the variation pattern number determined by the prior variation pattern determination The designated command and are stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, when the winning prior variation pattern determination process is executed, the second look-ahead designation command for specifying the variation mode number determined by the winning prior variation mode determination and the winning prior variation pattern determination Determined by and a third prefetch designation command designating the variation pattern number obtained are stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
On the other hand, when the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of failure is executed, and it is determined to be a "fixed value" by prior random number type determination, a second look-ahead specification command that specifies the variation mode number determined by the preliminary variation mode determination at the time of failure , and a third look-ahead designation command that designates the variation pattern number determined by the prior variation pattern determination at the time of rejection are stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
On the other hand, when the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of failure is executed, and it is determined as "undefined value" by prior random number type determination, a second look-ahead designation command that designates "undefined value" and a second look-ahead designation command that designates "undefined value" 3 prefetch designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S9-10, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 game is in progress, and if it is determined that the special figure 2 game is not in progress (No), the process moves to step S9-11, and the special figure 2 game is in progress. If it is determined that there is (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-7).
In this embodiment, the game based on the special figure 2 game information (fluctuation display of the second special symbol, stop display of the second special symbol, small hit game state based on the special figure 2 game information, and special figure 2 game information If it is not in progress, it is determined that the special figure 2 game is not in progress, and the game based on the special figure 2 game information (variation display of the second special symbol, the second special Symbol stop display, small hit game state based on special figure 2 game information, and big hit game state based on special figure 2 game information, if any game) is in progress, special figure 2 game Determined to be inside.
In step S9-11, a special figure 2 winning information setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the special figure 2 winning information setting process, in the special figure 2 winning information setting flag area of the RAM 230, information specifying the generation of the special figure 2 winning ("1" in this embodiment) is set.

(Special game management processing)
Next, the special game management process of step S4-13 will be explained.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing special game management processing.
In this embodiment, the game (hereinafter referred to as "special game") executed based on the special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "special game") phase / stage (hereinafter referred to as "special game phase") as "special symbol variation waiting state" , ``Special figure fluctuating state'', ``Special figure stop symbol display state'', ``First big prize opening pre-open state'', ``First big prize opening control state'', and ``First big prize opening Closing enabled state", "Waiting state for ending the opening of the first big prize winning opening", "State before opening the second big winning prize", "Controlled state for opening the second big winning prize", and "Closed the second big winning prize "Valid state" and "Wait state for ending the opening of the second big prize opening" are stipulated.
Then, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (special game phase flag) corresponding to one of the "11" special game phases is set.
Also, the ROM 220 stores a special game control module corresponding to each special game phase as a special game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the special game.
Then, in the special game management process, a special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and a process based on the selected special game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-13, as shown in FIG. 20, the process first proceeds to step S10-1.
In step S10-1, special game phase acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S10-2, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (special game phase) acquired in step S10-1 is read.
In step S10-3, a special game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game control module execution process, the process based on the special game control module read in step S10-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value obtained in step S10-1 is a value corresponding to the "special figure fluctuation waiting state", the later-described special figure fluctuation waiting process is started, and the "special figure fluctuation state" If it is a value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation process described later is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the "special figure stop symbol display state", the special figure stop process described later is started, If the value corresponds to the "pre-opening state of the first big winning opening", the processing before opening the first big winning opening, which will be described later, is started, and the value corresponds to the "control state of opening the first big winning opening". In this case, the first big winning opening opening control process to be described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "first big winning opening closing valid state", the first big winning opening closing effective process to be described later is started. If the value corresponds to the "first big winning opening end wait state", a first big winning opening ending waiting process to be described later is started, and corresponds to the "second big winning mouth opening pre-open state". If the value corresponds to the second big winning hole opening pre-processing described later, and if the value corresponds to the "second big winning hole opening control state", the second big winning hole opening described later is started. When the control process is started and the value corresponds to the "second big winning opening closing valid state", the second big winning opening closing valid process to be described later is started, and the "second big winning opening closing end wait state" is started. , a wait process for ending the opening of the second big winning opening, which will be described later, is started.

(Special figure fluctuation waiting process)
Next, the special figure variation waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a special figure variation waiting process.
When the special figure variation waiting process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 21, the process first proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is "1" or more, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is "1" or more (Yes) In, when it moves to step S11-2 and determines that the value of the special figure 1 pending number counter is not "1" or more (No), it moves to step S11-17.
In step S11-2, special figure 1 reservation number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-3. In the special figure 1 reservation number update process, as a special symbol determination flag setting value, a value (in this embodiment, "0") specifying a game based on the special figure 1 game information is set, and a special figure 1 reservation number counter Subtract "1" from the value of
Here, in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area is given priority over the special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area, A start determination is performed.
In step S11-3, a hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-4. In the pending number specification command setting process, a special figure pending number specifying command specifying that the special figure 1 pending number has decreased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S11-4, a special symbol storage area shift process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-5. In the special symbol storage area shift process, the storage area in which the game information is stored is shifted.
Concretely, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value=“1”, the storage contents of the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, clear (initialize) the storage contents of the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area.
On the other hand, if the set value of the special symbol discrimination flag=“0”, the contents stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, clear (initialize) the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area.

In step S11-5, setting abnormality determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6. In the setting error determination process, occurrence of setting error is monitored.
Specifically, in the setting abnormality determination process, first, the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 is acquired. Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired setting value is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (“6” in this embodiment).
When it is determined that the obtained setting value is not less than the predetermined setting comparison value (is equal to or greater than the predetermined setting comparison value), the value of the gaming machine state flag area (gaming machine state flag) of the RAM 230 is set to the setting abnormal state. Store (save) the corresponding value. Also, a subcommand specifying the occurrence of a setting error is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-6).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired setting value is less than the predetermined setting comparison value, the next process (step S11-6) is performed.

In step S11-6, a special figure hit determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the special figure hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (special figure hit determination).
In the special figure hit determination process, first, the special figure big hit determination process is executed.
In the special figure big hit determination process, first, the value (set value) set in the setting value area is checked, and the special figure big hit lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, based on the big hit random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read special figure big hit lottery table, it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a "big hit" (special Figure jackpot judgment).
Specifically, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 matches the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, the result of the special pattern lottery is determined. It is judged as a "jackpot" (winning).
On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 does not match the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "jackpot" has not been won. do.
When it is determined that the "big hit" is not won by the special figure big hit determination process, the special figure small hit determination process is executed.
In the special figure small hit determination process, the special figure small hit lottery table corresponding to the special symbol discrimination flag set value is read. Then, whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a "small win" based on the value of the big win random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read special figure small win lottery table. To determine (special figure small hit determination).
Specifically, when the value of the big hit random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 matches the value of the small hit registered in the special small prize lottery table, the special symbol lottery is executed. The result is determined as a "small hit" (winning).
On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 does not match the jackpot value registered in the special-picture jackpot lottery table, the "jackpot" is won. judge not.
When it is determined that the "small hit" is not won by the special symbol small hit determination processing, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be "loss".

In step S11-7, a special symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (special symbol determination).
Concretely, in the special figure design determination processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is determined as a "big hit" (election) by special figure hit determination.
Then, when it is determined as "big hit" (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the type of "big hit design" is determined.
For this, the jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the set value of the special symbol discrimination flag is read. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read-out big winning symbol lottery table, the type of the big winning symbol is determined.
At this time, as described above, when the game information stored in the storage area 0 is the special figure 1 game information, one of the "big hit pattern 1" and the "big hit pattern 2" is determined.
On the other hand, when the game information stored in the storage area 0 is the special figure 2 game information, one of "big hit pattern 3" to "big hit pattern 8" is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined as "small hit" (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the type of "small hit design" is determined.
For this, the small winning design lottery table corresponding to the set value of the special design discrimination flag is read. Then, the type of the small winning symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read small winning symbol lottery table.
At this time, any one of "small winning symbol 1" to "small winning symbol 6" is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "lost" (lost) by the special figure hit determination, "missing design" is determined as the type of the stop design.
Next, the symbol information designating the type of the determined stop symbol is set (stored) in the symbol information storage area of the RAM 230 .

In step S11-8, a pattern type specifying command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the symbol type designation command setting process, a special symbol type designation command designating the type of the stop symbol determined in step S11-7 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-9, a special figure stop pattern number determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the special figure stop design number determination process, the stop design number of the special design is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a stop symbol number lottery table in which correspondences between winning symbol random numbers and stop symbol numbers (segment data) are registered.
In addition, as stop pattern number lottery tables, a stop pattern number lottery table for big wins corresponding to "big hits", a stop pattern number lottery table for small wins corresponding to "small wins", and a stop pattern number lottery table for losers corresponding to "losses". A pattern number lottery table is stored.
In addition, as a jackpot stop pattern number lottery table, a jackpot stop pattern number lottery table corresponding to the first special pattern (special figure 1 game information) and a jackpot time corresponding to the second special pattern (special figure 2 game information) A stop symbol number lottery table is stored.
In the special figure stop pattern number determination process, first, the result of the special figure hit determination is confirmed.
Then, when it is determined as a ``big hit'' (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the setting value of the special symbol determination flag is confirmed, and the stop symbol number lottery table at the time of the big hit corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read-out big-hit stop symbol number lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined as "small hit" (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the stop symbol number lottery table at the time of small hit is read. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read small winning stop symbol number lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "lost" (lost) by the special figure per determination, the stop design number lottery table is read when losing. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read stop symbol number lottery table upon losing.
Next, the determined stop symbol number is stored in the stop symbol number storage area of the RAM 230 .

In step S11-10, a special figure variation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, the variation mode (variation pattern type) of the special symbol is determined.
Specifically, in the special figure variation pattern determination process, first, the result of the special figure per determination is confirmed. And, if the result of the special figure hit determination is a loss ("missing"), a special figure variation determination process at the time of loss, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination is winning ("big win" or "minor win"), special figure variation mode determination processing at the time of winning, which will be described later, is executed.

In the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of defeat, first, the type of reach group random number ("undefined value" or "fixed value") included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 is determined (random number type determination).
In the random number type determination, if the value of the reach group random number contained in the game information stored in the storage area 0 is less than "8500", it is determined as "indefinite value", and if it is "8500" or more, it is determined as " fixed value”.
In the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of defeat, next, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined (reach group determination).
In reach group determination, when "fixed value" is determined by random number type determination, the reach group determination table corresponding to "fixed value" is read. On the other hand, when "undefined value" is determined by random number type determination, the reach group determination table corresponding to "undefined value" is read. Then, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined based on the reach group random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read reach group determination table.
In the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of defeat, next, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) is determined (variation mode determination at the time of defeat).
In the determination of fluctuation mode at the time of defeat, the reach group number determined by the reach group determination, the pending type (type of game information stored in storage area 0), the number of pending (game information stored in storage area 0) The number of holds corresponding to the type of) and the current game state ("normal state", "time saving state 1" or "time saving state 2") are confirmed, and the determination of fluctuation mode at the time of defeat corresponding to this confirmation result read the table.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read-out fluctuation mode determination table at the time of defeat, the fluctuation mode number (variation mode type) and the fluctuation pattern judgment at the time of defeat Determine the table and
In the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of defeat, next, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined (variation pattern determination at the time of defeat).
In the failure variation pattern determination, first, the failure variation pattern determination table determined by the failure variation mode determination is read.
Then, the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) is determined based on the special figure variation pattern random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read-out failure variation pattern determination table.

In the special figure variation mode determination process when winning, first, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) is determined (variation mode determination when winning).
In winning variation mode determination, first, the reservation type (type of game information stored in storage area 0), the current game state ("normal state", "time saving state 1", "time saving state 2" or "time saving State 3") and the type of the stop symbol determined by the special symbol determination are confirmed, and the winning variation mode determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read winning variation mode determination table, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and winning variation pattern determination Determine the table and
In the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of winning, next, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined (variation pattern determination at the time of winning).
In the winning variation pattern determination, first, the winning variation pattern determination table determined by the winning variation mode determination is read.
Then, the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) is determined based on the special figure variation pattern random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read variation pattern determination table at the time of winning.

In step S11-11, a variation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the variation pattern command setting process, a special figure variation pattern specification command specifying the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) determined in step S11-10 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-12, a special figure fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-13. In the special figure fluctuation time setting process, the time for the special symbol fluctuation display is set.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation time setting process, first, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number determined in step S11-10 is obtained. And, the acquired fluctuation time is set to the special game timer.

In step S11-13, a special figure variation display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-14. In the special figure fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set to the special figure display timer.
Next, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", a predetermined initial value is set to the special figure 1 display symbol counter. With this, lighting control of the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter is performed among the predetermined number of segments that constitute the special figure 1 display device.
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag set value = "1", a predetermined initial value is set to the special figure 2 display symbol counter. By this, lighting control of the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 2 display pattern counter is performed among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device.

At step S11-14, game state preliminary setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-15. In the game state preliminary setting process, when the result of the special figure winning determination is winning ("big win" or "minor win"), the game state after the big win game state is finished is set in advance.
Specifically, in the game state preliminary setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure hit determination is "big hit" or "small hit". Then, when it is determined that the result of the special figure hit determination is "big hit" or "small hit", a preliminary flag setting process to be described later is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-15). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the special figure hit determination is "off", the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-15) without executing the preliminary flag setting process.
In the preliminary flag setting process, the type of the time saving state to be started after the end of the jackpot game state and the number of times of time saving are set preliminarily.
Specifically, in the preliminary flag setting process, first, the current game state (“normal state”, “time saving state 1”, “time saving state 2” or “time saving state 3”) and the type of stop design (“jackpot design 1” to “big hit pattern 8” or “small hit pattern 1” to “small hit pattern 6”).
Then, when the current game state is the “normal state” and the stop symbol is the “jackpot symbol 1”, the value (this In the embodiment, "2") is set. In addition, "100" is set as the value of the first spare time counter, "1" is set as the value of the second spare time counter, and "5" is set as the value of the third spare time counter.
On the other hand, when the current game state is "time saving state 1" to "time saving state 3" and the stop pattern is "big hit pattern 1", in the preliminary time saving control flag area of RAM 230, "time saving state 2 ” (“2” in this embodiment) is set. In addition, "100" is set as the value of the first spare time counter, "1" is set as the value of the second spare time counter, and "5" is set as the value of the third spare time counter.
On the other hand, when the current game state is "normal state" and the stop pattern is "jackpot pattern 2" to "jackpot pattern 7", in the preliminary time saving control flag area of RAM 230, "time saving state 1" is set ("1" in this embodiment). In addition, "100" is set as the value of the first spare time counter, "1" is set as the value of the second spare time counter, and "5" is set as the value of the third spare time counter.
On the other hand, when the current gaming state is "time saving state 1" to "time saving state 3" and the stop pattern is "big hit pattern 2" to "big hit pattern 7", the preliminary time saving control flag area of RAM 230 , a value (“1” in this embodiment) that designates “time saving state 1” is set. In addition, "100" is set as the value of the first spare time counter, "1" is set as the value of the second spare time counter, and "5" is set as the value of the third spare time counter.
On the other hand, if the current game state is the “normal state” and the stop symbol is the “jackpot symbol 8”, the value (this In the embodiment, "3") is set. In addition, "33" is set as the value of the first spare time counter, "1" is set as the value of the second spare time counter, and "5" is set as the value of the third spare time counter.
On the other hand, when the current game state is "time saving state 1" to "time saving state 3" and the stop pattern is "big hit pattern 8", in the preliminary time saving control flag area of RAM 230, "time saving state 3 ” (“3” in this embodiment) is set. In addition, "33" is set as the value of the first spare time counter, "1" is set as the value of the second spare time counter, and "5" is set as the value of the third spare time counter.
On the other hand, when the current game state is "normal state" and the stop pattern is "small hit design 1" to "small hit design 5", in the preliminary time saving control flag area of RAM 230, "time saving state 1” (“1” in this embodiment) is set. In addition, "100" is set as the value of the first spare time counter, "1" is set as the value of the second spare time counter, and "5" is set as the value of the third spare time counter.
On the other hand, when the current game state is "time saving state 1" to "time saving state 3" and the stop design is "small hit design 1" to "small hit design 5", preliminary time saving control of RAM 230 In the flag area, a value (“1” in the present embodiment) that designates “time saving state 1” is set. In addition, "100" is set as the value of the first spare time counter, "1" is set as the value of the second spare time counter, and "5" is set as the value of the third spare time counter.
On the other hand, when the current game state is the "normal state" and the stop symbol is the "small hit symbol 6", the value specifying the "time saving state 3" in the spare time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 ( In this embodiment, "3") is set. In addition, "33" is set as the value of the first spare time counter, "1" is set as the value of the second spare time counter, and "5" is set as the value of the third spare time counter.
On the other hand, when the current game state is "time saving state 1" to "time saving state 3", and the stop pattern is "small hit pattern 6", in the preliminary time saving control flag area of RAM 230, "time saving state 3” (“3” in this embodiment) is set. In addition, "33" is set as the value of the first spare time counter, "1" is set as the value of the second spare time counter, and "5" is set as the value of the third spare time counter.

In step S11-15, a number cutting management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-16. The number cutting management process will be described later.
In step S11-16, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure fluctuating state" is set.
In step S11-17, in the special figure 2 winning information flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not information specifying the occurrence of the special figure 2 winning ("1" in this embodiment) is set. If it is determined that the information specifying the occurrence of 2 winning is set ("1" is set) (Yes), the process moves to step S11-18 and specifies the occurrence of special figure 2 winning If it is determined that the information is not set ("0" is set) (No), the process proceeds to step S11-19.
In step S11-18, a special figure 2 winning information cancellation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-4. In the special figure 2 winning information cancellation process, as a special symbol determination flag setting value, a value (in this embodiment, "1") specifying a game based on the special figure 2 game information is set, and special figure 2 winning information setting In the flag area, information specifying non-occurrence of special figure 2 winning (in this embodiment, "0") is set.
In step S11-19, a customer waiting setting process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the customer waiting setting process, the demonstration designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

(Number of cutting management processing)
Next, the number cutting management process executed in step S11-15 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the number cutting management process.
When the number cutting management process is executed in step S11-15, as shown in FIG. 22, the process first proceeds to step S28-1.
In step S28-1, it is determined whether or not the time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2 or time-saving control 3) is in progress, and if it is determined that the time-saving control is in progress (Yes), step S28-2 , and when it is determined that the time saving control is not being performed (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S11-16) is performed.
Here, when the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is "1" to "3", it is determined that the time saving control is being performed, and the value set in the time saving control flag area is "0" If so, it is determined that the time reduction control is not in progress.
In step S28-2, a third time saving counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-3. In a 3rd time saving counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of a 3rd time saving counter.
In step S28-3, it is determined whether or not the value of the third time saving counter has been updated from "1" to "0" (whether or not "time saving end condition 3" has been established), and the value of the third time saving counter is not updated from "1" to "0"("time saving end condition 3" is not established) (No), the process moves to step S28-4, the value of the third time saving counter has been updated from "1" to "0"("time saving termination condition 3" is satisfied) (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-7.

In step S28-4, it is determined whether or not to start the variable display of the second special symbol, and if it is determined to start the variable display of the second special symbol (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-5, When it is determined that the variable display of the second special symbol is not started (the variable display of the first special symbol is started) (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-16). do. In this embodiment, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", it is determined to start the variable display of the second special symbol, and when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", the second special symbol It is determined that the variable display of is not started.
In step S28-5, a second time saving counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-6. In a 2nd time saving counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of a 2nd time saving counter.
In step S28-6, it is determined whether or not the value of the second time saving counter has been updated from "1" to "0" (whether or not "time saving end condition 2" has been established), and the value of the second time saving counter has been updated from "1" to "0"("time saving end condition 2" is established) (Yes), the process moves to step S28-7, and the value of the second time saving counter is "1 ” to “0” is not updated (“time saving end condition 2” is not satisfied) (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S11-16) Transition.

In step S28-7, time saving control stop processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-8. In time saving control stop processing, "0" is set to the time saving control flag area of RAM230. Moreover, "0" is set as a value of each time reduction counter (1st time reduction counter, 2nd time reduction counter, 3rd time reduction counter). Shortening of working hours control is stopped by this.
In step S28-8, a subcommand setting process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-16). In the subcommand setting process, a subcommand specifying a change in game state (stop of time saving control) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

(Processing during special figure fluctuation)
Next, the processing during special figure fluctuation executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing processing during special figure fluctuation.
When the special figure fluctuation process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 23, the process first proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S12-2 If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S12-10.
In step S12-2, a special figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-3. In the special figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer.

In step S12-3, a special figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-4. In the special figure stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special figure stop display data setting process, the stop design number stored in the stop design number storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, when the special symbol discrimination flag set value = "0", the acquired stop symbol number (data corresponding to the stop symbol number) is set as the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter. Thereby, lighting control (stop display) is performed for the segment corresponding to the set stop design number among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device.
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", the acquired stop symbol number (data corresponding to the stop symbol number) is set as the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter. Thereby, lighting control (stop display) is performed for the segment corresponding to the set stop design number among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device.

In step S12-4, a stop designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-5. In the stop specified command setting process, the special figure stop specified command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S12-5, it is determined whether or not to end the variable display of the first special symbol, and if it is determined to end the variable display of the first special symbol (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-6, When it is determined that the variable display of the first special symbol is not terminated (the variable display of the second special symbol is terminated) (No), the process proceeds to step S12-8. In this embodiment, if the set value of the special symbol discrimination flag = "0", it is determined to end the variation display of the first special symbol, and if the set value of the special symbol discrimination flag = "1", the first special symbol It is determined that the variable display of is not terminated.
In step S12-6, it is determined whether or not the current game state is "normal state", and if it is determined that the current game state is "normal state" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-7. If it is determined that the current game state is not the "normal state" (the time-saving state) (No), the process proceeds to step S12-8.
At step S12-7, an external signal setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-8. In the external signal setting process, "1" is added to the value of the external information fixed number counter.

At step S12-8, idle time management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-9. In the free time management process, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the free time counter.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the idle time counter has been decremented from "1" to "0". Then, when it is determined that the value of the idle time counter has been subtracted from "1" to "0", the value of the first time saving counter is set to "100", and the value of the second time saving counter is set to "1". ", set "1" as the value of the third time saving counter, and set "1" to the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 . By this, time saving control 1 is started. On the other hand, if it is determined that the idle time counter value has not been decremented from "1" to "0", the next process (step S12-9) is performed.
In step S12-9, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure stop symbol display state" is set.

In step S12-10, it is determined whether the value of the special figure display timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S12- 11, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S12-11, a special figure variation display data update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special figure fluctuation display data update process, the data for controlling the fluctuation display of the special figure display device is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure variation display data update process, when the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, "1" is added to the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, "1" is added to the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter.

(Processing during special stoppage)
Next, the special figure stopping process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing processing during special figure stop.
When the special figure stopping process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 24, the process first proceeds to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S13-2 When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S13-2, it is determined whether or not the type of the stopped design is the "big hit design", and if it is determined that the type of the stopped design is the "big hit design" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-3. When it is determined that the type of the stopped symbol is not the "big hit symbol" (No), the process proceeds to step S13-8.
At step S13-3, game state update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-4. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, "0" is set as the value of the play time counter.
In the game state update process, next, it is determined whether or not "1" to "3" are set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM230.
Then, when it is determined that "1" to "3" are set in the time saving control flag area, as the value of each time saving counter (first time saving counter, second time saving counter, third time saving counter), " 0” is set, and “0” is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 . Thereby, the time saving control (time saving control 1, working time saving control 2 or working time saving control 3) is stopped.
On the other hand, when it is determined that "1" to "3" are not set in the time saving control flag area ("0" is set), the next process (step S13-4) is performed.
In step S13-4, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role item 55a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a second special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "jackpot symbol". Each second special electric role control table corresponds to the opening time, the closing effective time of the big winning gate, the closing time of the big winning gate, the ending time, the number of rounds (number of round games), and each round (round game). The number of opening/closing switching times, the control data (solenoid control data and control time data) of the special electric accessory solenoid 65 corresponding to each opening/closing switching, etc. are defined.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the second special electric role control table corresponding to the type of “jackpot symbol” determined in step S11-8 is read, and the read second special electric role control table is stored in the RAM 230 as a special electric role control table. Set in the electrical control table area.
Next, "0" is set in the counter for the number of times the special electric service has been continuously operated.

At step S13-5, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-6. In the opening time setting process, the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer.
In step S13-6, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the opening designation command setting process, the opening designation command designating the type of "jackpot design" determined in step S11-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Also, a predetermined number (1 [times] in this embodiment) is added to the value of the external information jackpot number counter.
In step S13-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the second big winning opening" is set.

In step S13-8, it is determined whether or not the type of the stopped design is a "small winning design", and if it is determined that the type of the stopping design is a "small winning design" (Yes), step S13- 9, and when it is determined that the type of the stopped symbol is not the "small winning symbol" (the "losing symbol") (No), the process proceeds to step S13-13.
In step S13-9, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-10. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role item 55a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a first special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "small winning symbol". In each first special electric role control table, there are opening time, effective time for closing the big winning opening, closing time for the big winning opening, ending time, number of rounds (number of small winning games), and each round (small winning game). , the control data (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.) of the special electric accessory solenoid 65 corresponding to the opening and closing switching of each time, the V area solenoid 66 corresponding to each round (small hit game) Control data (solenoid control data and control time data) and the like are defined.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the first special electric role control table corresponding to the type of "small winning symbol" determined in step S11-8 is read, and the read first special electric role control table is stored in the RAM 230. Set in the special electric role control table area.
Next, "0" is set in the counter for the number of times the special electric service has been continuously operated.

At step S13-10, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-11. In the opening time setting process, the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer.
In step S13-11, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-12. In the opening designation command setting process, the opening designation command designating the type of "small winning pattern" determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S13-12, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the first big winning opening" is set.

In step S13-13, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure variation waiting state" is set.

(1st Grand Prize Opening Pre-Opening Process)
Next, the pre-opening process for the first big winning opening executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the pre-opening process of the first big winning hole.
When the first big winning hole pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 25, the process first proceeds to step S14-1.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S14-2. When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S14-2, special electric service continuous operation frequency counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter.
In step S14-3, a round start specifying command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start designation command setting process, a round start designation command designating the start of the round corresponding to the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, a process for setting the number of opening/closing switching times for special electric power is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special electric service open/close switching number setting process, the first special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the opening/closing switching number corresponding to the value of the special service continuous operation counter is set. read out. Then, the opening/closing switching frequency read out is set in the special electric service opening/closing switching frequency counter. Next, "0" is set as the value of the special electric winning number counter.
In step S14-5, a special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "first big winning opening open control state" is set.

(First big prize opening control process)
Next, the first big winning hole opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the first big winning hole opening control process.
When the first big winning hole opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 26, the process first proceeds to step S16-1.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S16-2 If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching number counter is "0". , the process proceeds to step S16-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service switching frequency counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, a special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-4. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric role winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (10 [balls] in this embodiment). If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5. ends the series of processes and shifts to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S16-5, a big winning opening control ending process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the big winning opening opening control end process, solenoid control data specifying de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the special electric accessory 55a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S16-6, a special winning opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the large winning opening closing effective time setting process, the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined large winning opening closing valid time (interval time) is Set the game timer.
In step S16-7, a round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end designation command setting process, a round end designation command designating the end of the round (small winning game) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "first big winning opening closed valid state" is set.

(1st Grand Prize Opening Closing Effective Processing)
Next, a description will be given of the first big winning opening closing valid process executed in step S10-3.
FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the first big winning opening closing effective process.
When the first big winning opening closing valid process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 27, the process first proceeds to step S17-1.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S17-2 When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S17-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes ), the process proceeds to step S17-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S17-9.
Here, the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the number of rounds specified in the special electric role control table is acquired as a specified value to make a determination. conduct.
In step S17-3, it is determined whether or not the value set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230 is "1", and it is determined that the value set in the V winning flag area is "1". If so (Yes), the process moves to step S17-4, and if it is determined that the value set in the V winning flag area is "0" (No), the process moves to step S17-11.

In step S17-4, game state update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-5. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, "0" is set as the value of the play time counter.
In the game state update process, next, it is determined whether or not "1" to "3" are set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM230.
Then, when it is determined that "1" to "3" are set in the time saving control flag area, the value of the time saving counter (first time saving counter, second time saving counter, third time saving counter) is set to a predetermined value While setting an initial value (this embodiment "0"), "0" is set to the time saving control flag area|region of RAM230. Shortening of working hours control is stopped by this.
On the other hand, when it is determined that "1" to "3" are not set in the time saving control flag area ("0" is set), the process proceeds to the next step (step S17-5).

In step S17-5, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role item 55a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a second special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "small winning symbol". Each second special electric role control table corresponds to the opening time, the closing effective time of the big winning gate, the closing time of the big winning gate, the ending time, the number of rounds (number of round games), and each round (round game). The number of opening/closing switching times, the control data (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.) of the special electric accessory solenoid 65 corresponding to each opening/closing switching are stipulated.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the second special electric role control table (for big win) corresponding to the type of "minor winning symbol" determined in step S11-5 is read, and the read second special electric role control table is read. (for big wins) is set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 .
Next, "0" is set in the counter for the number of times the special electric service has been continuously operated.

At step S17-6, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the opening time setting process, the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer.
In step S17-7, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-8. In the opening designation command setting process, an opening designation command designating the start of the jackpot game state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the second big winning opening" is set.

In step S17-9, a big winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-10. In the big winning hole closing time setting process, the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined big winning hole closing time is set in the special game timer.
In step S17-10, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the first big winning opening" is set.

In step S17-11, ending time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-12. In the ending time setting process, the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer.
In step S17-12, an ending specifying command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-13. In the ending specifying command setting process, the ending specifying command specifying the end of the small winning game state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-13, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "first big winning opening open end wait state" is set.

(Wait processing for ending the opening of the 1st big prize opening)
Next, the wait process for ending the opening of the first big winning opening executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the wait process for ending the opening of the first big winning opening.
When the first big winning hole opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 28, the process first proceeds to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S18-2. When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S18-2, a V non-winning designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the V non-winning designation command setting process, the V non-winning designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S18-3, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure variation waiting state" is set.

(Second Grand Prize Opening Pre-Processing)
Next, the pre-opening process for the second big winning opening executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the pre-opening process for the second big winning opening.
When the second big winning hole pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 29, the process first proceeds to step S40-1.
In step S40-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S40-2 When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S40-2, special electric service continuous operation number counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-3. In the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter.
In step S40-3, a round start designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-4. In the round start designation command setting processing, a round start designation command designating the start of the round corresponding to the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S40-4, a process for setting the number of opening/closing times of special electric service is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-5. In the special electric service open/close switching number setting process, the second special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the opening/closing switching number corresponding to the value of the special service continuous operation counter is set. read out. Then, the opening/closing switching frequency read out is set in the special electric service opening/closing switching frequency counter.
Next, "0" is set as the value of the special electric winning number counter.
In step S40-5, a special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-6. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S40-6, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "second big winning opening open control state" is set.

(Second Grand Prize Opening Control Processing)
Next, the second big winning opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the second big winning hole opening control process.
When the second big winning hole opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 30, the process first proceeds to step S41-1.
In step S41-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S41-2 If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S41-4.
In step S41-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching number counter is "0". , the process proceeds to step S41-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service open/close switching frequency counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-5.
In step S41-3, a special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-4. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S41-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric role winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (8 [ball] in this embodiment), and the value of the special electric role winning number counter reaches a predetermined value. If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-5. ends the series of processes and shifts to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S41-5, a special winning opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-6. In the big winning opening opening control end process, solenoid control data specifying de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the second special electric accessory 55a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S41-6, a large winning opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-7. In the large winning opening closing effective time setting process, a predetermined large winning opening closing effective time (interval time) is set to a special Set the game timer.
In step S41-7, a round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-8. In the round end designation command setting process, a round end designation command designating the end of the round game is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S41-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "second big winning opening closed valid state" is set.

(Second Grand Prize Opening Closing Effective Processing)
Next, a description will be given of the second big winning opening closing effective process executed in step S10-3.
FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the second big winning opening closing effective process.
When the second big winning opening closing valid process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 31, the process first proceeds to step S42-1.
In step S42-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S42-2. When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S42-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes ), the process proceeds to step S42-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S42-6.
Here, the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the number of round games specified in the special electric role control table is acquired as a specified value for determination. I do.

In step S42-3, ending time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-4. In the ending time setting process, the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer. Also, a predetermined play time count (600 [times] in this embodiment) is set as the value of the play time counter.
In step S42-4, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-5. In the ending specifying command setting process, an ending specifying command specifying the end of the jackpot game state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S42-5, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "second big winning opening end wait state" is set.
In step S42-6, a big winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-7. In the big winning hole closing time setting process, the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined big winning hole closing time is set in the special game timer.
In step S42-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the second big winning opening" is set.

(Wait processing for ending the opening of the second big prize opening)
Next, the waiting process for ending the opening of the second big winning opening, which is executed in step S10-3, will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the waiting process for ending the opening of the second big winning opening.
When the second big winning hole opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 32, the process first proceeds to step S43-1.
In step S43-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S43-2 When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S43-2, game state setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-3. In the game state setting process, the game state is set.
Specifically, in the gaming state setting process, the same value as the value set in the preliminary time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 . Moreover, the value same as the value set to the spare 1st time saving counter is set to a 1st time saving counter. Moreover, the value same as the value set to the spare 2nd time saving counter is set to a 2nd time saving counter. Furthermore, the value same as the value set to the spare 3rd time saving counter is set to a 3rd time saving counter. Thereby, the game state (the type of time saving state and the number of times of time saving) after the end of the big hit game state is set based on the information set in the game state preliminary setting process (step S11-14).
In the game state setting process, next, “0” is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230 .
In step S43-3, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure variation waiting state" is set.

(Special electric service opening/closing switching processing)
Next, the special electric service open/close switching process in steps S14-5, S16-3, S40-5 and S41-3 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the special electric service opening/closing switching process.
When the special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5, S16-3, S40-5, and S41-3, as shown in FIG. 33, the process first proceeds to step S15-1.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service open/close switching number counter is "0". , the process proceeds to step S15-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service open/close switching frequency counter is "0" (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S14-6 , S16-4, S40-6, S41-4).
In step S15-2, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric accessory 55a to be in an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control data setting process, the first special electric service control table or the second special electric service control table set in the special service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the special service opening/closing operation is performed. Read the solenoid control data corresponding to the value of the switching number counter. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data specifying energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the control of the special electric accessory solenoid 65 is started based on the set solenoid data, and the special electric accessory 55a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S15-3, a special electric service control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special electric service control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control time setting process, the first special electric service control table or the second special electric service control table set in the special service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the special service opening/closing operation is performed. Read the control time corresponding to the value of the switching number counter. Then, the read control time is set to the special game timer.
In step S15-4, a special electric power opening/closing switching frequency counter update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the next process (steps S14-6, S16-4, S40-6, S41-4) is performed. . In the special electric service opening/closing switching frequency counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching frequency counter.

(Normal game management processing)
Next, the normal game management process of step S4-14 will be explained.
FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing normal game management processing.
Here, in the present embodiment, the game (hereinafter referred to as "normal game") executed based on the normal symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "normal game") phase / stage (hereinafter referred to as "normal game phase"), "normal pattern fluctuation waiting state", "Normal figure fluctuating state", "Normal figure stop pattern display state", "Normal figure electric accessory open state", "Normal figure electric accessory open control state", "Normal figure electric accessory closed valid State" and "normal figure electric accessory open end wait state" are defined.
Then, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (normal game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven normal game phases is set.
Also, the ROM 220 stores a normal game control module corresponding to each normal game phase as a normal game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the normal game.
Then, in the normal game management process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and the process based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-14, as shown in FIG. 34, the process first proceeds to step S19-1.
In step S19-1, normal game phase acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value (normal game phase) set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S19-2, normal game control module acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-3. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value (normal game phase) acquired in step S19-1 is read.

In step S19-3, a normal game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game control module execution process, the process based on the normal game control module read in step S19-2 is started.
Specifically, if the value obtained in step S19-1 is a value corresponding to the "normal pattern fluctuation waiting state", the normal pattern fluctuation waiting process described later is started, corresponding to the "normal pattern fluctuation state" If it is a value, the normal pattern fluctuation process described later is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the "normal pattern stop symbol display state", the normal pattern stop process described later is started, "Before opening normal electric accessories state”, the normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the “normal electric accessary product opening control state”, the normal electric accessary product opening control process described later is performed. If it is a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory closed valid state", the normal electric accessory closing valid process described later is started and the value corresponds to the "normal electric accessory open end wait state" , The normal electric accessary product opening end wait process to be described later is started.

(Normal pattern change waiting process)
Next, the general pattern fluctuation waiting process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing normal pattern change waiting processing.
When normal figure fluctuation waiting processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 35, the process first proceeds to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether the value of the general pattern reservation number counter is "1" or more, and if it is determined that the value of the general pattern reservation number counter is "1" or more (Yes) , Move to step S20-2, if it is determined that the value of the normal figure pending number counter is not "1" or more (No), end the series of processes and move to the next process (step S4-15) do.

In step S20-2, normal figure pending number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the general pattern reservation number update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the normal pattern reservation number counter.
In step S20-3, a hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the pending number specification command setting process, the normal pattern pending number specifying command specifying that the normal pattern pending number has decreased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
In step S20-4, normal design storage area shift processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the normal symbol storage area shift process, the storage area in which the game information is stored is shifted.
Concretely, the storage contents of the storage area 1 of the normal game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 2 of the general-purpose game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 1 of the general-purpose game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 3 of the general-purpose game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 2 of the general-purpose game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the general-purpose game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 3 of the general-purpose game information storage area. Next, clear (initialize) the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the normal game information storage area.

In step S20-5, the normal figure hit-lose determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the normal pattern lottery determination process, the result of the normal pattern lottery is determined (normal pattern hit/loss determination).
The ROM 220 stores a general pattern winning/losing lottery table in which winning values of the normal symbol lottery are registered.
Then, in the general pattern hit-loss determination process, the hit random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0, the normal pattern hit-loss lottery table corresponding to the current execution status of the time saving control (during execution or stopped), Based on, the normal figure win-lose judgment is executed.
Specifically, when the value of the hit random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 matches the hit value, the result of the normal pattern lottery is determined as "normal pattern hit" (winning). do.
On the other hand, when the value of the winning random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 does not match the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined as "loss" (loss).

In step S20-6, normal pattern stop symbol determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the normal pattern stop symbol determination process, the type of the normal pattern stop symbol (stop symbol number) is determined (normal pattern stop symbol determination).
In the normal pattern stop symbol determination process, when it is determined as "per normal pattern" (election) by the normal pattern hit/loss determination, the type of "normal pattern per pattern" is determined (normal pattern stop symbol determination).
The ROM 220 stores a normal per pattern lottery table in which correspondence between general per per pattern random numbers and types of "general per per pattern" is registered. Then, in the general-pattern winning symbol lottery table, "normal-perching symbol 1", "universal-perching symbol 2" and "normal-perching symbol 3" are registered as the types of "permanent per-performing symbol".
Then, in the normal pattern stop symbol determination process, based on the general pattern per pattern random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the general pattern per pattern lottery table, the type of normal per pattern (stop Design number) is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "lost" (lost) by the normal figure winning/losing determination, "missing symbol" is determined as the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number).
Next, the determined stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 .
In step S20-7, a pattern type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the symbol type specification command setting process, the normal symbol type specification command specifying the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) determined in step S20-6 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S20-8, normal figure fluctuation pattern determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-9. In the general pattern variation pattern determination process, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) in the normal pattern is determined (normal pattern variation pattern determination).
The ROM 220 stores a general pattern variation pattern determination table in which correspondence between general pattern variation pattern random numbers and variation pattern numbers (variation pattern types) is registered.
In addition, as a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, the game state ("normal state", "time saving state 1", "time saving state 2" or "time saving state 3") and the type of stop pattern ("normal pattern per pattern 1" , "normal pattern per pattern 2" or "normal pattern per pattern 3"), and a general pattern variation pattern determination table corresponding to each combination is stored.
In the general pattern variation pattern determination process, first, the current game state and the type of the stop symbol determined in step S20-7, read out the general pattern variation pattern determination table corresponding to the combination. Then, based on the general pattern fluctuation pattern random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the general pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, the type (variation pattern number) of the general pattern fluctuation pattern is determined.
In step S20-9, a variation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-10. In the variation pattern command setting process, the normal figure variation pattern specification command specifying the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) determined in step S20-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S20-10, normal figure fluctuation time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-11. In the general pattern fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the type of general pattern fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) determined in step S20-8 is obtained. And, the acquired fluctuation time is set to the normal game timer.
In step S20-11, normal figure fluctuation display data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-12. In the general pattern fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the general pattern display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal pattern fluctuation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the normal pattern display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the general pattern display symbol counter. As a result, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal pattern display symbol counter among the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal pattern display device is controlled to be lit.
Next, predetermined segment data is set as segment data corresponding to the normal map display device. As a result, lighting of the segment corresponding to the set segment data is controlled among the predetermined number of segments that constitute the normal map display device.

In step S20-12, an opening pattern setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-13. In the open pattern setting process, the type of open pattern (“short open pattern” or “long open pattern”) of the normal electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the game state per normal figure is selected/set.
Specifically, in the open pattern setting process, first, the type of open pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the game state per normal figure is selected.
The ROM 220 stores the game state (“normal state”, “time saving state 1”, “time saving state 2” or “time saving state 3”) and “normal pattern per pattern” (“normal pattern per pattern 1”, “normal pattern per pattern”). An open pattern selection table is stored in which the correspondence between the combination of "symbol 2" or "normal pattern 3") and the type of release pattern ("short release pattern" or "long release pattern") is registered. .
Then, in the open pattern selection table, the current game state = "normal state" (time saving control flag area = "0"), and the type of normal pattern stop pattern = "normal pattern per pattern 1", "normal pattern per pattern""Short open pattern" is designated as the type of open pattern corresponding to the case of "2" or "3 per normal pattern".
In addition, in the open pattern selection table, the current game state = "time saving state 1" (time saving control flag area = "1"), and the type of normal pattern stop pattern = "normal pattern per pattern 1", "normal per pattern""Long release pattern" is specified as the type of release pattern corresponding to "symbol 2" or "symbol 3 per normal pattern".
In addition, in the open pattern selection table, the current game state = "time saving state 2" (time saving control flag area = "2"), and the type of normal pattern stop pattern = "normal pattern per pattern 1" or "normal pattern per "Short release pattern" is specified as the type of release pattern corresponding to the case of "symbol 2".
Also, in the open pattern selection table, the current game state = "time saving state 2" (time saving control flag area = "2"), and the type of normal pattern stop pattern = "normal pattern per pattern 3". "Long release pattern" is specified as the type of release pattern.
In addition, in the open pattern selection table, the current game state = "time saving state 3" (time saving control flag area = "3"), and the type of normal pattern stop pattern = "normal pattern per pattern 1" or "normal pattern per "Short release pattern" is specified as the type of release pattern corresponding to the case of "symbol 2".
Also, in the open pattern selection table, the current game state = "time saving state 3" (time saving control flag area = "3"), and the type of normal pattern stop pattern = "normal pattern per pattern 3""Long release pattern" is specified as the type of release pattern.
In the opening pattern setting process, based on the opening pattern selection table, the current game state (the value of the time saving control flag area) and the type of the normal symbol stop symbol selected in step S20-6 correspond to the combination. Select the type of release pattern. Then, in the open pattern specifying flag area of the RAM 230, a value specifying the type of the selected open pattern is set.

In step S20-13, game state saving processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-14. In the game state saving process, a value designating the current game state is set (saved) in the game state saving flag area of the RAM 230 . Specifically, in the game state saving process, in the game state saving flag area of the RAM 230, the same value as the current value of the time saving control flag area is set.
In step S20-14, a number cutting management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-15. The number cutting management process will be described later.
In step S20-15, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the ordinary game phase update process, in the ordinary game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "ordinary figure fluctuating state" is set.

(Number of cutting management processing)
Next, the number cutting management process executed in step S20-14 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the number cutting management process.
When the number cutting management process is executed in step S20-14, as shown in FIG. 36, the process first proceeds to step S44-1.
In step S44-1, it is determined whether or not the time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2 or time-saving control 3) is in progress, and if it is determined that the time-saving control is in progress (Yes), step S44-2 , and when it is determined that the time saving control is not being performed (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S20-15).
Here, when the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is "1" to "3", it is determined that the time saving control is being performed, and the value set in the time saving control flag area is "0" If so, it is determined that the time saving control is not in progress.
In step S44-2, the first time saving counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S44-3. In a 1st time saving counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of a 1st time saving counter.
In step S44-3, it is determined whether the value of the first time saving counter has been updated from "1" to "0" (whether "time saving end condition 1" has been established), and the value of the first time saving counter is updated from “1” to “0” (“time saving end condition 1” is established) (Yes), the process moves to step S44-4, and the value of the first time saving counter is “1 ” to “0” is not updated (“time saving end condition 1” is not satisfied) (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S20-15) Transition.
In step S44-4, a time saving control stop process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S44-5. In time saving control stop processing, "0" is set to the time saving control flag area of RAM230. Moreover, "0" is set as a value of each time reduction counter (1st time reduction counter, 2nd time reduction counter, 3rd time reduction counter). Shortening of working hours control is stopped by this.
In step S44-5, subcommand setting processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S20-15) is performed. In the subcommand setting process, a subcommand specifying a change in game state (stop of time saving control) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

(Normal map fluctuation process)
Next, the process during normal figure fluctuation executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing processing during normal pattern fluctuation.
When the normal figure fluctuation process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 37, first, the process proceeds to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S21-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S21-8.
In step S21-2, normal figure stop time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-3. In the normal figure stop time setting process, the predetermined stop time is set to the normal game timer.
In step S21-3, normal map stop display data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-4. In the normal map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the normal map display device is set.
Specifically, in the general pattern stop display data setting process, the stop pattern number stored in the stop pattern storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, the acquired stop design number is set as the value of the normal diagram display design counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments that constitute the normal-symbol display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal-symbol display symbol counter is controlled to light up (stopped display).

In step S21-4, a stop designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the stop designation command setting process, the normal drawing stop designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S21-5, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of normal hit-loss determination was a time saving state (time saving state 1 to time saving state 3), and it was determined that the game state at the time of normal hit-loss determination was a time saving state. In the case (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-6, and when it is determined that the game state at the time of the normal figure winning/losing determination was not a time saving state (it was a normal state) (No), step S21-7 transition to In this embodiment, based on the value set in the game state saving flag area of the RAM 230, the game state at the time of normal figure win-lose determination is determined.
In step S21-6, an external signal setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-7. In the external signal setting process, "1" is added to the value of the external information fixed number counter.
In step S21-7, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the ordinary game phase update process, in the ordinary game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal figure stop symbol display state" is set.

In step S21-8, it is determined whether the value of the normal map display timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the normal map display timer is "0" (Yes), step S21- 9, and when it is determined that the value of the normal map display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S4-15) is performed.
In step S21-9, normal figure fluctuation display data update processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal pattern fluctuation display data update process, the data for controlling the variable display of the normal pattern display device is updated.
Specifically, in the general pattern fluctuation display data update process, "1" is added to the value of the general pattern display symbol counter.

(Normal map stop processing)
Next, the process during normal figure stop executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing processing during normal map stop.
When the normal map stop process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 38, the process first proceeds to step S22-1.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S22-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether or not the stop pattern is the "normal pattern per pattern", and if it is determined that the stop pattern is not the "normal pattern per pattern" (No), the process proceeds to step S22-3. However, when it is determined that the stopped symbol is the "normal pattern winning symbol" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal figure fluctuation waiting state" is set.

In step S22-4, normal electric service control data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the ordinary electric role control data setting process, control data for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set.
The ROM 220 stores an ordinary electric role control table corresponding to the "short circuit release pattern" and an ordinary electric role control table corresponding to the "short circuit release pattern". In each ordinary electric duty control table, the time before opening the ordinary electric duty, the valid time for closing the ordinary electric duty, the waiting time for the end of opening, the number of open/close switching times, the control data corresponding to each open/close switching (solenoid control data, control time, etc.) data), etc.
In the ordinary electric service control data setting process, an ordinary electric service control table corresponding to the type of opening pattern ("long opening pattern" or "short opening pattern") designated by the value set in the opening pattern designation flag area of the RAM 230 , and sets the read normal electric service control table in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the normal electric role control table corresponding to the type of opening pattern selected in the opening pattern setting process (step S20-12) is set in the ordinary electric role control table area of the RAM 230. FIG.
Next, referring to the ordinary electric work control table set in the ordinary electric work control table area of the RAM 230, the opening/closing switching times are read out. Then, the number of open/close switching times read out is set in the normal electric open/close switching number counter. In addition, "0" is set as the value of the winning number counter for the ordinary electric role.

At step S22-5, a normal electric service pre-opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the ordinary electric role opening time setting process, the ordinary electric role control table set in the ordinary electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined ordinary electric role opening time before the normal electric role opening is set in the ordinary game timer.
In step S22-6, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product opening pre-state" is set.

(Normal electric accessory opening preprocessing)
Next, the normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessory opening preprocessing.
When the normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 39, the process first proceeds to step S23-1.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S23-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S23-2, normal electric open/close switching processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The ordinary electric open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product opening control state" is set.

(Normal electrical open/close switching process)
Next, the normal electric open/close switching process in steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the ordinary electric open/close switching process.
When the ordinary electric switch opening/closing process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, as shown in FIG. 40, the process first proceeds to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is "0". If it is determined that the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is not "0" (No) , the process proceeds to step S24-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter is "0" (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S23-3 Or move to S25-4).
In step S24-2, normal electric service control data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the normal electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the normal electric accessory 52a to be in an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric power control data setting process, the normal electric power control table set in the normal electric power control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the solenoid corresponding to the value of the normal electric power open/close switching frequency counter is selected. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data specifying energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, control of the normal electric accessory solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the normal electric accessory 52a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S24-3, normal electric service control time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the normal electric power control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric service control time setting process, the normal electric service control table set in the normal service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the control corresponding to the value of the normal service open/close switching frequency counter is performed. read out the time. Then, the read control time is set to the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, normal electric switch open/close switching frequency counter update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S23-3 or S25-4) is performed. In the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter is newly set in the normal electric opening/closing switching number counter.

(Normal electric accessory opening control process)
Next, the normal electric accessory opening control process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product opening control processing.
When the normal electric accessary product opening control process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 41, the process first proceeds to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S25-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is "0". If it is determined that the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter value is not "0" , the process proceeds to step S25-3, and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, normal electric open/close switching processing (see FIG. 39) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (3 [ball] in this embodiment), and the value of the normal electric winning number counter reaches a predetermined value. If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5. ends the series of processes and shifts to the next process (step S4-15).

In step S25-5, normal electric power opening control end processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal electric power opening control end process, solenoid control data specifying de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the normal electric accessory 52a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S25-6, normal electric service closing effective time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the normal service closing effective time setting process, the normal service control table set in the normal service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined normal service closing valid time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S25-7, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product closing valid state" is set.

(Normal electric accessories closing effective processing)
Next, the normal electric accessary product closing valid process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product closing valid processing.
When the ordinary electric accessary product closing valid process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 42, the process first proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S26-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
At step S26-2, an opening end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the open end wait time setting process, the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined open end wait time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S26-3, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product open end wait state" is set.

(Normal electric accessory opening end wait process)
Next, the normal electric accessary product open end wait process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product opening end wait processing.
When the normal electric accessary product opening end wait process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 43, the process first proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S27-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S27-2, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal figure fluctuation waiting state" is set.

(Performance display device control processing)
Next, the performance display device control process at step S4-25 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing performance display device control processing.
The performance display device control processing is processing based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 . That is, the performance display device control processing is processing based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220 . Performance display device control processing is called during execution of timer interrupt processing.
When the performance display device control process is called in step S4-25, as shown in FIG. 44, the process proceeds to step S38-1.
In step S38-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-2. In the register saving process, the values of all the registers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to the saving area of the RAM. Also, the values of all stack pointers used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved in the save area of the RAM.

In step S38-2, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-3, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S38-11.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not the game ready status has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred. It is determined that no possible state has occurred.
In step S38-3, total out counter addition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-4.
In the total count counter addition process, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the OUT switch 109 has been detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected, "1" is added to the value of the total out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the total out counter is not added.

In step S38-4, it is determined whether or not it is in a predetermined game state, and if it is determined that it is in a predetermined game state (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-5, and it is determined that it is not in a predetermined game state. If so (No), the process proceeds to step S38-7.
Here, the "predetermined game state" is a game state in which the time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2, and time-saving control 3) is stopped and the jackpot game state is not occurring.
At step S38-5, normal out counter addition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-6.
In the normal out counter addition process, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the out switch 109 has been detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the OUT switch 109 is detected, "1" is added to the value of the normal OUT counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the OUT switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the normal OUT counter is not added.

In step S38-6, normal prize ball counter addition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-7.
In the normal prize ball counter addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of the game ball to the first start port 51. Add "1". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is not detected, the value of the normal ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of the game ball to the second start port 52. Add "1". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 is not detected, the value of the normal ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the right winning opening switch 105 is detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the right winning hole switch 105 is detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is added to the value of the normal winning ball counter, which is the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the right other winning hole 56. ” is added. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the right winning hole switch 105 is not detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the left winning port switch 106 is detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the left winning hole switch 106 is detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of game balls into the left other winning holes 57a to 57c. Add "4". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the left winning hole switch 106 is not detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is not added.

In step S38-7, it is determined whether or not the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value (Yes), step S38-8. , and when it is determined that the value of the total out counter has not reached the reference value (No), the process proceeds to step S38-9.
In this embodiment, the reference value=60000×n (n=integer). "n" is a value indicating the current section, and is set to "1" as an initial value.
In step S38-8, section update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-9. In the section update process, the section is updated.
In the section update process, first, the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230 is shifted (moved) to the base value buffer 2 of the RAM 230 .
Next, a predetermined initial value ("0" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the normal out counter. Also, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of the normal winning ball counter.
Next, "1" is added to the value (n) indicating the current section. This updates the reference value.
At step S38-9, a base ratio calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-10. In the base ratio calculation process, a base ratio is calculated.
Specifically, in the base ratio calculation process, the base ratio is calculated based on the value of the normal out counter and the value of the normal ball counter. Then, the calculated base ratio is stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230 .
Here, the base ratio is the ratio of the value of the normal winning ball counter to the value of the normal out counter.

At step S38-10, base ratio display data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-11. In the base ratio display data setting process, display data to be output to the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with an identification segment output request buffer (16 bits) and a ratio segment output request buffer (16 bits).
In the base ratio display data setting process, first, which base ratio to display is selected from the base ratio of the current section and the base ratio of the previous section.
Then, when the display of the base ratio of the current section is selected, information indicating that it is the base ratio of the current section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the current section is set to Set to ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data of "b" (8 bits) is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, and the display data of "b" (8 bits) is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer. , the display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to The display data corresponding to the ones digit of is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the character "b" is displayed by the LEDs 33 to 40, the character "b" is displayed by the LEDs 41 to 48, and the current state is displayed by the LEDs 49 to 56. A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio is displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64 .

On the other hand, if the display of the base ratio of the previous section is selected, information indicating that it is the base ratio of the previous section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the previous section is set to Set to ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" are set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, and the display data of "c" (8 bits) are set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer. , the display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to The display data corresponding to the ones digit of is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the character "b" is displayed by the LEDs 33 to 40, the character "c" is displayed by the LEDs 41 to 48, and the current state is displayed by the LEDs 49 to 56. A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio is displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64 .

In step S38-11, register restoration processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-12. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S38-1 (the value of the register used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) and the The value of the saved stack pointer (the value of the stack pointer used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) is restored.
At step S38-12, an interrupt permission process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-26). In the interrupt permission processing, the interrupt disabled state is released. As a result, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like is permitted.

(Variation effect/stop effect executed in pachinko machine 1)
Next, the variable effect/stop effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, when the start determination (special figure hit determination, special figure pattern determination, special figure variation pattern determination, etc.) based on the special figure 1 game information is executed, the special figure 1 display device, the first special symbol After the variable display is executed, the stop display of the first special symbol is executed in a mode according to the result of the start determination.
At this time, as a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 (three special figure display areas), the variable display of the special figure mini effect symbol a1 is executed, In the figure 4th design display area A2, the variable display of the special figure 4th production design a2 is executed.
Further, as a stop effect corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol, in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 (three special symbol display areas), the special symbol mini effect symbol a1 is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol In the fourth symbol display area A2, the stop display of the special symbol fourth effect symbol a2 is executed. At this time, the stop display of the performance symbols a1 and a2 is executed in a mode according to the result of the start determination.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1, when the start determination (special figure hit determination, special figure pattern determination, special figure variation pattern determination, etc.) based on the special figure 2 game information is executed, the second special After the variable display of the symbols is performed, the stop display of the second special symbol is performed in a mode according to the result of the start determination.
At this time, as a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 (three special figure display areas), the variable display of the special figure mini effect symbol a1 is executed, In the figure 4th design display area A2, the variable display of the special figure 4th production design a2 is executed.
Further, as a stop effect corresponding to the stop display of the second special symbol, in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 (three special symbol display areas), the special symbol mini effect symbol a1 is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol In the fourth symbol display area A2, the stop display of the special symbol fourth effect symbol a2 is executed. At this time, the stop display of the performance symbols a1 and a2 is executed in a mode according to the result of the start determination.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when the start determination (normal pattern win-lose determination, normal pattern stop symbol determination, normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) based on the normal pattern game information is executed, the normal pattern fluctuation After the display is executed, the stop display of the normal symbol is executed in a mode according to the result of the start determination.
At this time, as a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol mini symbol display area A3 (three general symbol display areas) is performed, and the variable display of the normal symbol mini effect symbol a3 is executed. In the 4-symbol display area A4, the variable display of the normal-symbol fourth effect symbol a4 is executed.
In addition, as a stop effect corresponding to the stop display of the normal pattern, the stop display of the normal pattern mini pattern display area A3 (three general pattern display areas) is executed, and the normal pattern 4th In the symbol display area A4, the stop display of the normal figure fourth effect symbol a4 is executed. At this time, the stop display of the performance symbols a3 and a4 is executed in a mode according to the result of the start determination.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, in the main effect symbol display area A5 (three effect symbol display areas), depending on the game state, the variable effect/stop effect corresponding to the variable display/stop display of the special symbol, or the normal symbol A variable effect/stop effect corresponding to the variable display/stop display of is executed.
Specifically, during the occurrence of the normal state, in the main effect symbol display area A5 (three effect symbol display areas), a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is performed. Along with being executed, a stop effect corresponding to the stop display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is executed.
That is, during the occurrence of the normal state, during the fluctuation display of the special design (first special design or second special design) in the special design display device (special design 1 display device or special design 2 display device), the special design As a variable effect corresponding to the variable display, the variable display of the first main effect symbol a5 is executed in the main effect symbol display area A5 (each special symbol display area). Also, during the stop display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the special figure display device (special figure 1 display device or special figure 2 display device), stop production corresponding to the stop display of the special symbol As a result, the first main effect symbol a5 is stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5 (each special symbol display area).

On the other hand, during the occurrence of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3, in the main production design display area A5 (three production design display areas), a variable production corresponding to the variable display of the normal design is executed, and the normal design is performed. A stop effect corresponding to the stop display is executed.
That is, during the occurrence of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3, the main production design display area A5 (each special In the figure display area), the variable display of the second main effect symbol a5 is executed. In addition, during the stop display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device, as a stop effect corresponding to the stop display of the normal symbol, the second main effect symbol a5 is displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5 (each special symbol display area). stop display is executed.
At this time, when the ``long open pattern'' is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3, the main effect pattern display area A5 corresponds to the ``winning pattern''. Stop symbols are stopped and displayed.
On the other hand, when the "short open pattern" is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3, the stop corresponding to the "missing pattern" in the main effect pattern display area A5. The pattern is stopped and displayed.
As a result, during the occurrence of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3, it is possible to grasp whether or not the "long open pattern" has been won based on the stop symbol that is stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A5. becomes.

Next, the period during which the performance symbols a1 to a5 are displayed will be described.
The display of the special figure mini effect symbol a1 in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the display of the special figure fourth effect symbol a2 in the special figure fourth symbol display area A2 are executed except for the display prohibition period. In this embodiment, as the display prohibition period, during the occurrence of the small winning game state (except during the ending period) and during the occurrence of the big win game state (except during the ending period) are defined. As a result, the display of the special figure mini effect symbol a1 in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the display of the special figure fourth effect symbol a2 in the special figure fourth symbol display area A2 are during the occurrence of the small winning game state ( It is executed except during the ending period) and during the occurrence of the jackpot game state (except during the ending period).
That is, the special figure mini effect symbol a1 and the special figure fourth effect symbol a2 are displayed during the period in which the small winning game state and the big winning game state are not generated. Then, when a "small win" is won by a special symbol lottery, display of the special figure mini effect symbol a1 and the special figure fourth effect symbol a2 is terminated (not displayed) in accordance with the start of the small win game state. , If the passage of the V area by the game ball is not detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, in response to the start of the ending period of the small hit gaming state, special figure mini production pattern a1 and special figure 4th production When the display of the symbol a2 is resumed and the passing of the game ball through the V area is detected while the small winning game state is occurring, at the start of the ending period of the big winning game state occurring after the small winning game state ends Accordingly, the display of the special figure mini effect pattern a1 and the special figure fourth effect pattern a2 is resumed. On the other hand, when the "big hit" is won by the special symbol lottery, the display of the special figure mini effect symbol a1 and the special figure fourth effect symbol a2 is ended (not displayed) according to the start of the big win game state, In accordance with the start of the ending period of the jackpot game state, the display of the special figure mini effect symbol a1 and the special figure fourth effect symbol a2 is resumed.
On the other hand, the display of the normal pattern mini effect pattern a3 in the normal pattern mini symbol display area A3 and the display of the normal pattern 4th effect pattern a4 in the normal pattern 4th pattern display area A4 are always (while the small winning game state is occurring) , and during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state) is executed.
On the other hand, the display of the main effect symbols a5 (the first main effect symbol a5, the second main effect symbol a5) in the main effect symbol display area A5 is during the occurrence of the small winning game state (including during the ending period), It is executed except during the occurrence of the jackpot game state (including during the ending period).
That is, the main effect symbol a5 (the first main effect symbol a5 or the second main effect symbol a5) is displayed during the period in which the small winning game state and the big winning game state are not occurring. Then, when a "small win" is won by a special symbol lottery, a main effect pattern a5 (first main effect pattern a5 or second main effect pattern a5) is displayed in accordance with the start of the small win game state. is terminated (hidden), and if the passage of the V area by the game ball is not detected during the occurrence of the small hit game state, the main production pattern a5 (the second When the display of the first main effect symbol a5 or the second main effect symbol a5) is resumed and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, the small win game state is entered. The display of the main effect symbol a5 (the first main effect symbol a5 or the second main effect symbol a5) is restarted according to the end of the jackpot game state that occurs after the end of . On the other hand, when a "jackpot" is won by the special symbol lottery, the display of the main effect symbol a5 (first main effect symbol a5 or second main effect symbol a5) ends in response to the start of the big win game state. Then, the display of the main effect symbol a5 (the first main effect symbol a5 or the second main effect symbol a5) is resumed according to the end of the big win game state.

Next, a method of controlling the display of the performance symbols a1 to a5 will be described.
The RAM of the effect control board 300 is configured with a special figure appearing eye information storage area in which special figure appearing eye information is stored and a normal figure appearing eye information storage area in which normal figure appearing eye information is stored. .
The "special symbol appearing information" is the mode of the stop symbol (stop display It is information that specifies the aspect of the production pattern to be made). Here, the mode of the stop symbol means a specific combination of the stop symbols (for example, the left symbol = "1", the middle symbol = "2", the right symbol = "3", the fourth symbol = "x", etc.). It has become.
In the stop display of the performance symbols a1 and a2 of each time, the mode of the performance symbols a1 and a2 to be stopped and displayed is controlled based on the special symbol appearing eye information stored in the special symbol appearing eye information storage area. . That is, in the stop display of the performance symbols a1 and a2 of each time, the performance symbols a1 and a2 are stop-displayed in a manner specified by the special symbol appearing eye information stored in the special symbol appearing eye information storage area. Here, the stop display of the performance symbols a1 and a2 is continued until the next variable display of the performance symbols a1 and a2 is started (except for the display prohibition period described above).
In addition, in the variable display of the performance symbols a1 and a2 each time, the mode of the performance symbols a1 and a2 displayed at the start of the variable display based on the special symbol appearing eye information stored in the special symbol appearing eye information storage area. is controlled. That is, in the variable display of the performance symbols a1 and a2 each time, at the start of the variable display, the performance symbols a1 and a2 are displayed in the manner specified by the special figure appearance information stored in the special figure appearance information storage area. From this mode, the variable display of the performance symbols a1 and a2 is started.
In addition, when the normal state is occurring, in the stop display of the first main effect symbol a5 of each time, the stop display is performed based on the special figure appearance information stored in the special figure appearance information storage area. The aspect of the 1 main effect pattern a5 is controlled. That is, when the normal state is occurring, in the stop display of the first main effect symbol a5 each time, the first special symbol appears in the mode specified by the special symbol symbol information stored in the special symbol symbol information storage area. The main effect pattern a5 is stopped and displayed.
Also, when the normal state is occurring, in the variable display of the first main effect symbol a5 each time, at the start of the variable display, based on the special figure appearing information stored in the special figure appearing information storage area The aspect of the first main effect symbol a5 to be displayed is controlled. That is, when the normal state is occurring, in the variable display of the first main effect symbol a5 each time, the special symbol appearance information storage area is used as the mode of the first main effect symbol a5 displayed at the start of the variable display. A mode designated by the special figure appearing information stored in is set, and from this mode, the variable display of the first main effect symbol a5 is started.

Specifically, when the CPU of the effect control board 300 receives a subcommand (a special figure type designation command, a special figure variation mode specification command, and a special figure variation pattern specification command) at the start of the special symbol variation display , Performs the special figure variation command reception processing (see FIG. 46) described later.
In the special figure fluctuation command reception process, first, based on the special figure appearance information stored in the special figure appearance information storage area, the aspect of the production patterns a1 and a2 to be displayed at the start of the variation display is set.
At this time, as the mode of the effect symbols a1 and a2 to be displayed at the start of the variable display, the mode specified by the special figure appearing information stored in the special figure appearing information storage area is set. Further, when the normal state is occurring, the aspect of the first main effect symbol a5 displayed at the start of the variable display based on the special symbol appearing eye information stored in the special symbol appearing eye information storage area. set. At this time, as the mode of the first main effect symbol a5 to be displayed at the start of the variable display, the mode specified by the special figure appearing information stored in the special figure appearing information storage area is set. As a result, when the normal state is occurring, the mode of the effect symbol a1 displayed at the start of the variable display is the same as the mode of the first main effect symbol a5 displayed at the start of the variable display. becomes.
In the special figure variation command reception process, next, based on the type of the special symbol stop symbol specified by the received special figure symbol type specification command, the stop symbol mode of the effect symbols a1, a2, a5 (stop display effect Patterns a1, a2, and a5) are selected.
In this embodiment, a plurality of "single-shot winning symbols" having different aspects are defined as "single-shot winning symbols". Further, a plurality of "patterns winning consecutive villas" having different modes are defined as the "pattern winning consecutive villas". Further, as the "losing symbols", a plurality of "normal losing symbols" having different modes and one "special losing symbol" are defined. Here, the mode of the "special losing design" is different from the mode of each "normal losing design".
Then, when "big hit pattern 1", "big hit pattern 8" or "small hit pattern 6" is specified by the special pattern type designation command, any mode among a plurality of "single hit patterns""Single-shot per pattern" is selected by lottery. On the other hand, when "jackpot pattern 2" to "jackpot pattern 7" or "small hit pattern 1" to "small hit pattern 5" are specified by the special pattern type specification command, a plurality of "consecutive per pattern , one of the modes of ``consecutive winning design'' is selected by lottery. On the other hand, when a "missing pattern" is designated by the special symbol type designation command, one of a plurality of "normal losing patterns" is selected by lottery. At this time, the "special lost symbol" is never selected.
In the special figure variation command receiving process, next, based on the mode of the stop symbols of the selected production symbols a1, a2, a5, the special figure appearance information stored in the special figure appearance information storage area is updated. . At this time, the special figure appearing information that designates the mode of the stop symbols of the selected production symbols a1, a2 and a5 is stored (set) in the special figure appearing information storage area.
Specifically, when one of the modes of "single winning design" is selected as the mode of the stop design of the production patterns a1, a2 and a5, the selected mode of "single winning design" is specified. The figure appearing information is stored (set) in the special figure appearing information storage area. On the other hand, when one of the modes of "multiple winning patterns" is selected as the mode of the stop design of the production patterns a1, a2 and a5, the selected mode of "multiple winning patterns" is specified. The figure appearing information is stored (set) in the special figure appearing information storage area. On the other hand, when one of the modes of "normal losing design" is selected as the mode of the stop design of the production patterns a1, a2, a5, a special design designating the "normal losing design" of the selected mode is selected. The eye information is stored (set) in the special figure appearing eye information storage area.
Moreover, CPU of the production|presentation control board 300 will perform special figure stop command reception processing (refer FIG. 47) mentioned later, if a special figure stop designation|designated command is received.
In the special figure stop command receiving process, based on the special figure appearance information stored in the special figure appearance information storage area, the mode of the effect symbols a1, a2 and a5 to be stopped and displayed is set. At this time, as the mode of the effect symbols a1 and a2 to be stopped and displayed, the mode designated by the special figure appearing information stored in the special figure appearing information storage area is set. In addition, when the normal state is occurring, as the mode of the first main effect symbol a5 to be stopped and displayed, the mode specified by the special figure appearing information stored in the special figure appearing information storage area is set. do. As a result, when the normal state is occurring, the mode of the stop-displayed effect symbol a1 and the mode of the stop-displayed first main effect symbol a5 are the same.

As described above, when the CPU of the effect control board 300 receives a subcommand (a special figure type specification command, a special figure variation mode specification command, and a special figure variation pattern specification command) at the start of the special symbol variation display, First, based on the special figure appearing eye information stored in the current special figure appearing eye information storage area, set the mode of the production patterns a1, a2, a5 to be displayed at the start of the current variable display, and then, Based on the type of stop symbol of the special symbol specified by the received special figure symbol type specifying command, the special figure appearing information stored in the special figure appearing information storage area is updated. Then, based on the special figure appearance information stored in the special figure appearance information storage area after updating, the mode of the effect symbols a1, a2 and a5 in the stop display corresponding to the current variation display is set.
As a result, the mode of the production patterns a1 and a2 normally displayed at the start of the variable display of the production patterns a1 and a2 of each time is the production patterns a1 and a2 that were stop-displayed in the stop display of the previous production patterns a1 and a2. It becomes the same as the aspect of Further, when the normal state is occurring, the mode of the first main effect symbol a5 displayed at the start of the variable display of the first main effect symbol a5 each time is the stop of the previous first main effect symbol a5. The mode of display is the same as that of the first effect symbol a5 that is stopped and displayed.

"Normal pattern appearing information" is information that designates the aspect of the stop symbol (the aspect of the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed) with respect to the performance symbols (specifically, the performance symbols a3, a4, a5) corresponding to the normal symbols. It's becoming Here, the mode of the stop symbol means a specific combination of the stop symbols (for example, the left symbol = "1", the middle symbol = "2", the right symbol = "3", the fourth symbol = "x", etc.). It has become.
Then, in the stop display of the performance symbols a3 and a4 each time, the mode of the performance symbols a3 and a4 to be stopped and displayed is controlled based on the normal symbol appearing eye information stored in the normal symbol appearing eye information storage area. . That is, in the stop display of the performance symbols a3 and a24 of each time, the performance symbols a3 and a4 are stop-displayed in a mode specified by the normal symbol appearing eye information stored in the normal symbol appearing eye information storage area. Here, the stop display of the performance symbols a3 and a4 is continued until the next variable display of the performance symbols a3 and a4 is started.
In addition, in the variable display of the performance symbols a3 and a4 of each round, the aspect of the performance symbols a3 and a4 displayed at the start of the variable display is based on the normal symbol appearing eye information stored in the general symbol appearing eye information storage area. is controlled. That is, in the variable display of the performance symbols a3 and a4 each time, at the start of the variable display, the performance symbols a3 and a4 are displayed in the manner specified by the normal symbol appearing eye information stored in the general symbol appearing eye information storage area. From this mode, the variable display of the performance symbols a3 and a4 is started.
Further, when the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3 are occurring, in the stop display of the second main effect symbol a5 of each time, based on the normal pattern appearing information stored in the general pattern appearing information storage area, The mode of the second main effect symbol a5 that is stopped and displayed is controlled. That is, when the time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3 are occurring, in the stop display of the second main effect pattern a5 of each time, the normal pattern appearing eye information stored in the normal pattern appearing eye information storage area. Then, the second main effect symbol a5 is stopped and displayed.
Further, when the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3 are occurring, in the variable display of the second main effect pattern a5 of each time, based on the normal pattern appearing information stored in the general pattern appearing information storage area, The aspect of the second main effect symbol a5 displayed at the start of the variable display is controlled. That is, when the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3 are occurring, in the variable display of the second main effect symbol a5 each time, the second main effect symbol a5 displayed at the start of the variable display A mode designated by the normal symbol appearing information stored in the appearing information storage area is set, and from this aspect, the variable display of the second main effect symbol a5 is started.

Specifically, when the CPU of the effect control board 300 receives a subcommand (general pattern type designation command and general pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display, a normal pattern fluctuation command to be described later Reception processing (see FIG. 48) is executed.
In the general pattern fluctuation command receiving process, first, based on the general pattern appearance information stored in the general pattern appearance information storage area, the aspect of the production patterns a3 and a4 to be displayed at the start of the variation display is set.
At this time, as the mode of the effect symbols a3 and a4 to be displayed at the start of the variable display, the mode specified by the normal-symbol appearing eye information stored in the normal-symbol appearing eye information storage area is set. Further, when the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3 are occurring, based on the normal figure appearing eye information stored in the general figure appearing eye information storage area, the second main displayed at the start of the variable display The aspect of production pattern a5 is set. At this time, as the mode of the second main effect symbol a5 to be displayed at the start of the variable display, the mode specified by the special-symbol appearing information stored in the normal-symbol appearing information storage area is set. Thereby, when the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3 are occurring, the aspect of the production pattern a3 displayed at the start of the variable display and the second main production pattern a5 displayed at the start of the variable display. and are the same.
In the general pattern variation command reception process, next, based on the type of the stop pattern of the normal pattern specified by the general pattern type specification command received, the stop design mode of the production patterns a3, a4, a5 (the production to be stopped and displayed Patterns a3, a4, and a5) are selected.
In this embodiment, a plurality of "hitting symbols" having different modes are defined as the "hitting symbols". In addition, a plurality of "missing symbols" having different modes are defined as "missing symbols".
Then, when "normal pattern per pattern 1" to "per normal pattern 3" are specified by the general pattern type specification command, and the current game state is the normal state, a plurality of "losing patterns"', any one of the 'failed symbols' is selected by lottery. On the other hand, when "normal pattern per pattern 1" to "normal per pattern 3" are specified by the general pattern type specification command, and the current game state is the time saving state 1, a plurality of "hit Among the "symbols", a "hit pattern" of any mode is selected by lottery. On the other hand, if the "normal pattern per pattern 1" or "normal per pattern 2" is specified by the general pattern type specification command, and the current game state is the time saving state 2 or the time saving state 3, Among a plurality of "missing symbols", one form of "missing symbol" is selected by lottery. On the other hand, when the "normal pattern per pattern 3" is specified by the general pattern type specification command, and the current game state is the time saving state 2 or the time saving state 3, among the plurality of "hit patterns" , or "hit pattern" of any mode is selected by lottery.
In the general pattern fluctuation command reception process, next, based on the mode of the stop pattern of the selected production patterns a3, a4, a5, the general pattern appearance information stored in the general pattern appearance information storage area is updated. . At this time, the normal pattern appearing eye information specifying the mode of the stop symbols of the selected production symbols a3, a4 and a5 is stored (set) in the normal symbol appearing eye information storage area.
Specifically, when one of the "hit patterns" is selected as the mode of the stop design of the production patterns a3, a4, a5, the normal pattern designating the "hit pattern" of the selected mode is selected. The eye information is stored (set) in the normal figure appearing eye information storage area. On the other hand, when one of the "missing symbols" is selected as the mode of the stop symbols of the production symbols a3, a4, a5, the special symbol appearing information specifying the "missing symbol" of the selected mode. is stored (set) in the special figure appearing information storage area.
Moreover, CPU of the production|presentation control board 300 will perform normal figure stop command reception processing (refer FIG. 49) mentioned later, if normal figure stop designation|designated command is received.
In the normal pattern stop command receiving process, based on the normal pattern pattern information stored in the normal pattern pattern information storage area, the mode of the effect symbols a3, a4, a5 to be stopped and displayed is set. At this time, as the mode of the performance symbols a3 and a4 to be stopped and displayed, the mode specified by the normal-symbol appearing eye information stored in the normal-symbol appearing eye information storage area is set. Further, when the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3 are occurring, as the aspect of the second main effect symbol a5 to be stopped and displayed, the normal figure appearing eye information stored in the normal figure appearing eye information storage area is displayed. Set the specified mode. Thus, when the time-saving state 1 to the time-saving state 3 are occurring, the mode of the stop-displayed performance pattern a2 and the mode of the stop-displayed second main performance pattern a5 become the same.

As described above, when the CPU of the effect control board 300 receives a subcommand (a general pattern type designation command and a general pattern variation pattern designation command) at the start of the normal pattern variation display, first, the current normal pattern On the basis of the normal pattern appearing eye information stored in the eye information storage area, the mode of the effect patterns a3, a4, a5 to be displayed at the start of the current variable display is set, and then the received normal pattern type specification is performed. Based on the type of the stop symbol of the normal symbol specified by the command, the normal symbol appearing eye information stored in the general symbol appearing eye information storage area is updated. Then, based on the normal-symbol appearing eye information stored in the normal-symbol appearing eye information storage area after updating, the mode of the effect symbols a3, a4, a5 in the stop display corresponding to the current variable display is set.
As a result, the mode of the production patterns a3 and a4 normally displayed at the start of the variable display of the production patterns a3 and a4 of each time is the production patterns a3 and a4 that were stop-displayed in the stop display of the previous production patterns a3 and a4. It becomes the same as the aspect of Further, when the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3 are occurring, the mode of the second main effect symbol a5 displayed at the start of the variable display of the second main effect symbol a5 each time is the same as the previous second main effect symbol a5. It is the same as the mode of the second main effect symbol a5 stopped and displayed in the stop display of the effect symbol a5.

Here, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the normal state is occurring, during the variable display of the first special symbol on the special figure 1 display device, a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol As, in the main effect symbol display area A5, the variable display of the first main effect symbol a5 is executed, and during the stop display of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device, the stop display of the first special symbol As a stop effect corresponding to , the stop display of the first main effect symbol a5 is executed in the main effect symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when the time saving state 2 is occurring, during the variable display of the normal symbols in the normal symbol display device, a second main effect is performed in the main effect symbol display area A5 as a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbols. The variable display of the pattern a5 is executed, and during the stop display of the normal pattern in the normal pattern display device, as a stop effect corresponding to the stop display of the normal pattern, a second main effect is performed in the main effect pattern display area A5. The stop display of the pattern a5 is executed.
As a result, when the "jackpot pattern 1" (hereinafter referred to as "first hit") is won based on the first special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, the performance patterns a1, a2 and a5 are selected. As the mode of the stop design, any mode of "single-shot winning pattern" is selected, and the special-feature information specifying the selected mode of "single-shot winning design" is stored in the special-feature information storage area ( set), and in the main effect symbol display area A5, after the variable display of the first main effect symbol a5 is executed, the first main effect symbol is displayed in accordance with the "single-shot winning symbol" of the selected mode. The stop display of a5 is executed, and after that, the time saving state 2 is generated according to the end of the big hit game state based on the "first hit".
Further, during the occurrence of the time saving state 2, in the main effect symbol display area A5, the variable display of the second main effect symbol a5 corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, and the stop display of the normal symbol is supported. Stop display of the second main effect symbol a5 is executed. Then, without winning the "long open pattern" by the normal symbol lottery executed during the time saving state 2, the number of normal symbol lotteries executed during the time saving state 2 occurred is the first time saving number (this implementation In the form, when it reaches 100 [times]), the time saving state 2 is terminated in response to the start of the variable display of the normal symbol for the first time saving number, and the normal state is generated. At this time, as the mode of the stop pattern of the production patterns a3, a4, and a5 corresponding to the first time reduction number of variable display, one of the modes of "lost pattern" is selected, and in the main production pattern display area A5 , After the variable display of the second main effect symbol a5 is executed, the stop display of the second main effect symbol a5 is executed in accordance with the selected mode of "missing symbol".
In this configuration, if no measures are taken, if the special symbol lottery is not executed during the time saving state 2, until the time saving state 2 ends, in the special figure appearance information storage area, "first hit The state in which the special symbol appearance information designating the "single-shot per symbol" of the mode selected based on the first special symbol lottery related to "is maintained. As a result, after the shift from the time saving state 2 to the normal state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed for the first time, the first symbol displayed at the start of the variable display in the main effect symbol display area A5. As the aspect of the main effect symbol a5, the “single winning symbol” of the aspect selected based on the first special symbol lottery related to the “first winning” is set.
Then, in the main effect symbol display area A5, after the stop display of the second main effect symbol a5 based on the "missing symbol" is executed, the second main effect symbol a5 based on the "missing symbol" is stopped. Following the display, the variable display of the first main effect symbol a5 is started from the state where the "single-shot winning symbol" is displayed, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to rewrite (change) the special figure appearance information stored in the special figure appearance information storage area when the small winning game state or the big winning game state is terminated. That is, when the small winning game state or the big winning game state is terminated, the special figure appearance information stored in the special figure appearance information storage area is replaced with any form of "hit design"("single-hitdesign"). ” or “Renso per pattern”), it is configured to be rewritten to special figure appearing information that designates “missing pattern”. In particular, when the small winning game state or the big winning game state is terminated, the special figure appearance information stored in the special figure appearance information storage area is replaced with any form of "hit design"("single-hitdesign"). ” or “Renso per pattern”) is rewritten to special figure appearance information that specifies “special lost pattern”.
Specifically, the CPU of the effect control board 300 executes an ending command reception process (see FIG. 50), which will be described later, upon receiving the ending designation command. Then, in the ending command reception process, the special figure appearance information stored in the special figure appearance information storage area is updated. At this time, the special figure appearance information specifying the "special lost symbol" is stored (set) in the special figure appearance information storage area.
Moreover, CPU of the production|presentation control board 300 will perform the power interruption return command reception process (refer FIG. 51) mentioned later, if a power interruption return designation|designated command is received. In the power failure recovery command reception process, the received power failure recovery designation command designates the occurrence of the big win game state or the occurrence of the small win game state as the timing of power interruption (timing of power recovery). Determine whether or not Then, when it is determined that the received power interruption return designation command designates the occurrence of the big win game state or the occurrence of the small win game state as the timing at which the power interruption occurs (timing to restore the power source). , To update the special figure appearance information stored in the special figure appearance information storage area. At this time, the special figure appearance information specifying the "special lost symbol" is stored (set) in the special figure appearance information storage area. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received power failure recovery designation command does not specify the occurrence of the big win game state or the occurrence of the small win game state as the timing of power interruption (timing to restore power) , Do not update the special figure appearance information stored in the special figure appearance information storage area.
In addition, the CPU of the effect control board 300 updates the special figure appearance information stored in the special figure appearance information storage area even when the RAM clear designation command is received. At this time, the special figure appearing information specifying the "normal lost symbol" is stored (set) in the special figure appearing information storage area.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, at the end of the jackpot game state related to the "first hit", the special figure appearance information stored in the special figure appearance information storage area is a special figure designating the "special losing pattern". It can be rewritten with the information that comes out. As a result, even if the special symbol lottery is not executed while the time saving state 2 is occurring, after the transition from the time saving state 2 to the normal state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed for the first time, the main In the effect symbol display area A5, "special losing symbol" is set as the mode of the first main effect symbol a5 displayed at the start of the variable display. In this case, during the occurrence of the time saving state 2, the performance symbols a1 and a2 are always stop-displayed as "special lost symbols".
Then, in the main effect symbol display area A5, after the stop display of the second main effect symbol a5 based on the "missing symbol" is executed, the second main effect symbol a5 based on the "missing symbol" is stopped. Following the display, it is possible to start the variable display of the first main effect symbol a5 from the state where the "special lost symbol" is being displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of discomfort. .
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, at the end of the big win game state or the small win game state, and at the time of recovery from the power shutdown, the special figure appearance information stored in the special figure appearance information storage area is changed to "special loss". It can be rewritten to special figure appearance information that specifies "symbol". Here, the "special missing symbol" is not set according to the result of the start determination. That is, the "special lost symbol" is not selected or set in the stop symbol determination process (step S50-2), which will be described later. As a result, when the "special lost symbol" is displayed as the mode of the first main effect symbol a5, it is possible to grasp that the special symbol appearing information has been replaced based on the "special lost symbol". It becomes possible.

(Processing executed by production control board 300)
Next, processing executed by the CPU of the effect control board 300 will be described.

(Special figure fluctuation command reception processing)
First, the special figure variation command reception processing will be described.
Figure 46 is the flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation command reception processing.
CPU of the production control board 300, in response to receiving a predetermined control command (special figure pattern type designation command, special figure fluctuation mode designation command, and special figure fluctuation pattern designation command), the special figure shown in FIG. Executes variable command reception processing.
In the special figure variation command receiving process, first, the process proceeds to step S50-1.
In step S50-1, a fluctuation start symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S50-2. In the variation start symbol determination process, the aspect of the effect symbols a1 and a2 to be displayed at the start of the variation display and the aspect of the first main effect symbol a5 to be displayed at the start of the variation display are selected (determined).
Specifically, in the variation start symbol determination process, as the aspect of the effect symbols a1 and a2 to be displayed at the start of the variation display, the aspect specified by the special figure appearance information stored in the special figure appearance information storage area is selected. (decide. In addition, as the mode of the first main effect symbol a5 to be displayed at the start of the variable display, the mode specified by the special figure appearing information stored in the special figure appearing information storage area is selected (determined).

In step S50-2, stop symbol determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S50-3. In the stop symbol determination process, the mode of the stop symbols of the effect symbols a1, a2, a5 (the mode of the effect symbols a1, a2, a5 to be stopped and displayed) is selected (determined).
The ROM of the effect control board 300 contains a first stop symbol lottery table corresponding to the "single-shot winning symbol", a second lottery symbol lottery table corresponding to the "continuous winning symbol", and a second lottery symbol lottery table corresponding to the "losing symbol". 3 stop symbol lottery table is stored.
In the first stop symbol lottery table, the correspondence between the stop symbol lottery random number and the mode of the "single winning symbol" is registered. In the second stop symbol lottery table, the correspondence between the stop symbol lottery random number value and the mode of "consecutive winning symbols" is registered. In the third stop symbol lottery table, the correspondence between the stop symbol lottery random number value and the mode of "lost symbol" is registered.
In the stop symbol determination process, first, a stop symbol lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Next, the stop design lottery table corresponding to the type of stop design of the special design specified by the received special design type designation command is read. Then, based on the acquired stop symbol lottery random number and the read stop symbol lottery table, the mode of the stop symbol is selected (determined).
In step S50-3, a special figure appearance information update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S50-4. In the special figure appearance information update process, the special figure appearance information stored in the special figure appearance information storage area is based on the mode of the stop design of the production symbols a1, a2, and a5 selected in step S50-2. update.
Specifically, in the special figure appearance information update process, the special figure appearance information that specifies the mode of the stop symbols of the production symbols a1, a2, and a5 selected in step S50-2 is stored in the special figure appearance information storage area. Store (set) in

In step S50-4, a variable effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S50-5. In the variable effect determination process, a variable effect number (mode of variable effect) is determined.
Concretely, in fluctuation production decision processing, first, first half fluctuation production decision processing which decides the first half fluctuation production number (mode of first half fluctuation production) is executed.
A ROM of a performance control board 300 stores a first half variable performance lottery table in which correspondence between a variable mode number (type of variable mode) and a first half variable performance number (mode of first half variable performance) is registered.
In the first half variation performance determination process, first, the first half variation performance lottery table is read. Then, among the first half variation performance numbers registered in the first half variation performance lottery table, the first half variation performance number corresponding to the variation mode number specified by the special figure variation mode designation command is determined (selected).
In the variable effect determination process, next, the second half variable effect determination process for determining the second half variable effect number (mode of the second half variable effect) is executed.
A ROM of a performance control board 300 stores a latter half variable performance lottery table in which correspondence between a variation pattern number (variation pattern type) and a second half variable performance number (mode of second half variable performance) is registered.
In the second half variation performance determination process, first, the second half variation performance lottery table is read. Then, out of the second half variation performance numbers registered in the second half variation performance lottery table, the second half variation performance number corresponding to the variation pattern number specified by the special figure variation pattern designation command is determined (selected).
In step S50-5, a notice effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S50-6. In the notice effect determination process, whether or not to execute various notice effects (main notice effect, sub notice effect, etc.) is selected, and the content of the notice effect to be executed is selected and set.

With step S50-6, fluctuation production setting processing is executed, this special figure fluctuation command reception processing ends. In the variable performance setting process, a variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols is set.
Concretely, in the fluctuation production setting process, first, the fluctuation production relating to the production patterns a1 and a2 is set. This includes the effect control table corresponding to the first half variable effect number determined in step S50-4 and the effect control table determined in step S50-4 among the effect control tables that define the progress of the variable effect related to the effect patterns a1 and a2. A performance control table corresponding to the second half variable performance number is read. Next, the read performance control tables are combined to generate a performance control table for variable performances related to the performance patterns a1 and a2. At this time, the mode selected in step S50-1 is set as the mode of the effect symbols a1 and a2 to be displayed at the start of the variable display (variable effect). Then, the generated effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area of the RAM of the effect control board 300 . As a result, the variable display of the performance symbols a1 and a2 is started according to the set performance control table. At this time, the mode selected in step S50-1 is set as the mode of the effect symbols a1 and a2 displayed at the start of the variable display.
In the variable effect setting process, next, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal state. Then, when it is determined that the current game state is the normal state, a variable effect related to the first main effect pattern a5 is set. Among the effect control tables that define the progress of the variable effect related to the first main effect pattern a5, the effect control table corresponding to the first half variable effect number determined in step S50-4 and A performance control table corresponding to the determined second half variable performance number is read. Next, the read effect control tables are combined to generate the effect control table for the variable effect related to the first main effect pattern a5. At this time, the mode selected in step S50-1 is set as the mode of the first main effect symbol a5 to be displayed at the start of the variable display (variable effect). Then, the generated effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area of the RAM of the effect control board 300 . As a result, the variable display of the first main effect pattern a5 is started according to the set effect control table. At this time, the mode selected in step S50-1 is set as the mode of the first main effect symbol a5 displayed at the start of the variable display. Furthermore, when the execution of the notice effect is determined in step S50-5, the effect control table corresponding to the determined notice effect is read, and the read effect control table is transferred to the effect control of the RAM of the effect control board 300. Set in the table setting area. As a result, the advance notice effect is executed according to the set effect control table.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (when it is determined that it is the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3), the variable effect related to the first main effect pattern a5 and the notice effect are set. do not.

(Special figure stop command reception processing)
Next, the special figure stop command reception processing will be described.
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a special figure stop command reception process.
The CPU of the effect control board 300 executes a special figure stop command reception process shown in FIG. 47 in response to receiving the special figure stop designation command.
In the special figure stop command receiving process, first, the process moves to step S51-1.
In step S51-1, the stop effect setting process is executed, and the special figure stop command reception process of this time ends. In the stop effect setting process, the stop effect corresponding to the stop display of the special symbols is set.
Specifically, in the stop effect setting process, first, the stop effect related to the effect symbols a1 and a2 is set. For this, the effect control table that defines the progress of the stop effect related to the effect patterns a1 and a2 is read, and the read effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. At this time, as the mode of the effect symbols a1 and a2 to be stopped and displayed, the mode designated by the special figure appearing information stored in the special figure appearing information storage area is set. As a result, stop display of the performance symbols a1 and a2 is started according to the set performance control table. At this time, a mode specified by the special figure appearing information stored in the special figure appearing information storage area is set as the aspect of the performance symbols a1 and a2 to be stopped and displayed.
In the stop effect setting process, next, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal state. Then, when it is determined that the current game state is the normal state, a stop effect related to the first main effect pattern a5 is set. For this, the effect control table that defines the progress of the stop effect related to the first main effect pattern a5 is read, and the read effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. At this time, as the aspect of the first main effect symbol a5 to be stopped and displayed, the aspect specified by the special figure appearance information stored in the special figure appearance information storage area is set. As a result, the stop display of the first main effect pattern a5 is started according to the set effect control table. At this time, as the mode of the first main effect symbol a5 to be stop-displayed, the mode specified by the special figure appearing eye information stored in the special figure appearing eye information storage area is set.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the current game state is not the normal state (when it is determined that it is the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3), the stop effect related to the first main effect pattern a5 is not set.

(normal figure fluctuation command reception processing)
Next, normal figure fluctuation command reception processing is explained.
FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing normal pattern variation command reception processing.
The CPU of the production control board 300 executes the general pattern variation command reception process shown in FIG. .
In normal figure fluctuation command reception processing, first, it moves to step S52-1.
In step S52-1, a fluctuation start symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S52-2. In the variation start symbol determination process, the aspect of the effect symbols a3 and a4 to be displayed at the start of the variation display and the aspect of the second main effect symbol a5 to be displayed at the start of the variation display are selected (determined).
Specifically, in the variation start symbol determination process, as the aspect of the effect symbols a3 and a4 to be displayed at the start of the variation display, the aspect specified by the normal symbol appearing eye information stored in the normal symbol appearing eye information storage area is selected. (decide. In addition, as the mode of the second main effect symbol a5 to be displayed at the start of the variable display, the mode specified by the normal-symbol appearing eye information stored in the normal-symbol appearing eye information storage area is selected (determined).

In step S52-2, stop symbol determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S52-3. In the stop symbol determination process, the mode of the stop symbols of the performance symbols a3, a4 and a5 (the mode of the performance symbols a3, a4 and a5 to be stopped and displayed) is selected (determined).
The ROM of the performance control board 300 stores a win stop symbol lottery table corresponding to "winning symbols" and a losing stop symbol lottery table corresponding to "losing symbols".
Correspondences between stop symbol lottery random numbers and "win symbol" modes are registered in the winning stop symbol lottery table. Correspondences between stop symbol lottery random numbers and "lost symbol" modes are registered in the lost stop symbol lottery table.
In the stop symbol determination process, first, a stop symbol lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Next, the normal symbol type specified by the received normal symbol type specifying command and the current game state are confirmed, and the stop symbol lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. At this time, when "normal pattern per pattern 1" to "per normal pattern 3" are specified by the general pattern type specification command, and the current game state is the normal state, the losing stop pattern lottery read the table. On the other hand, when "normal pattern per pattern 1" to "normal per pattern 3" are specified by the general pattern type specification command, and the current game state is the time saving state 1, the winning stop pattern lottery read the table. On the other hand, if the "normal pattern per pattern 1" or "normal per pattern 2" is specified by the general pattern type specification command, and the current game state is the time saving state 2 or the time saving state 3, Read out the dropout stop symbol lottery table. On the other hand, when ``normal pattern winning pattern 3'' is specified by the normal pattern type specification command and the current game state is the time saving state 2 or the time saving state 3, the winning stop pattern lottery table is read. Then, based on the acquired stop symbol lottery random number and the read stop symbol lottery table, the mode of the stop symbol is selected (determined).
In step S52-3, normal figure appearance information update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S52-4. In the regular pattern appearing eye information update process, the general pattern appearing eye information stored in the general pattern appearing eye information storage area based on the mode of the stop symbols of the production symbols a3, a4, and a5 selected in step S52-2. to update.
Specifically, in the regular pattern appearing eye information update process, the general pattern appearing eye information specifying the mode of the stop symbols of the production symbols a3, a4, and a5 selected in step S52-2 is stored in the general symbol appearing eye information storage area. Store (set) in

In step S52-4, a variable effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S52-5. In the variable effect determination process, a variable effect number (mode of variable effect) is determined.
The ROM of the performance control board 300 stores a variable performance lottery table in which the correspondence between the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) and the variation performance number (variation performance aspect) is registered.
In the fluctuation production determination process, first, the fluctuation production lottery table is read. And, among the fluctuation production numbers registered in the fluctuation production lottery table, the fluctuation production number corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number specified by the normal pattern fluctuation pattern specification command is determined (selected).
In step S52-5, a notice effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S52-6. In the notice effect determination process, whether or not to execute various notice effects (main notice effect, sub notice effect, etc.) is selected, and the details of the notice effect to be executed are selected and set.

With step S52-6, fluctuation production setting processing is executed, this time normal figure fluctuation command reception processing ends. In the variable performance setting process, a variable performance corresponding to the variable display of normal symbols is set.
Concretely, in the variable production setting process, first, the variable production related to the production patterns a3 and a4 is set. For this, among the effect control tables that define the progress of the variable effect related to the effect patterns a3 and a4, the effect control table corresponding to the variable effect number determined in step S52-4 is read, and the read effect control table is It is set in the production control table setting area of the RAM of the production control board 300 . At this time, the mode selected in step S52-1 is set as the mode of the effect symbols a3 and a4 to be displayed at the start of the variable display (variable effect). As a result, the variable display of the performance symbols a3 and a4 is started according to the set performance control table. At this time, the mode selected in step S52-1 is set as the mode of the effect symbols a3 and a4 displayed at the start of the variable display.
In the variable effect setting process, next, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3. Then, when it is determined that the current game state is the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3, a variable effect related to the second main effect pattern a5 is set. This involves reading out the effect control table corresponding to the variable effect number determined in step S52-4 among the effect control tables that define the progress of the variable effect related to the second main effect pattern a5, and reading out the effect control table. is set in the effect control table setting area of the RAM of the effect control board 300 . At this time, the mode selected in step S52-1 is set as the mode of the second main effect symbol a5 to be displayed at the start of the variable display (variable effect). As a result, the variable display of the second main effect pattern a5 is started according to the set effect control table. At this time, the mode selected in step S52-1 is set as the mode of the second main effect symbol a5 displayed at the start of the variable display. Furthermore, when the execution of the notice effect is determined in step S52-5, the effect control table corresponding to the decided notice effect is read, and the read effect control table is transferred to the effect control of the RAM of the effect control board 300. Set in the table setting area. As a result, the advance notice effect is executed according to the set effect control table.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the current game state is not the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3 (if it is determined to be the normal state), the variable effect related to the second main effect pattern a5 and the notice effect are set. do not.

(Regular map stop command reception processing)
Next, normal figure stop command reception processing is explained.
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing normal map stop command reception processing.
The CPU of the effect control board 300 executes normal pattern stop command reception processing shown in FIG. 49 in response to receiving the normal pattern stop designation command.
In the general map stop command reception process, first, the process moves to step S53-1.
In step S53-1, the stop effect setting process is executed, and the normal figure stop command reception process of this time ends. In the stop effect setting process, the stop effect corresponding to the stop display of the normal symbol is set.
Specifically, in the stop effect setting process, first, the stop effect related to the effect symbols a3 and a4 is set. For this, the effect control table that defines the progress of the stop effect related to the effect patterns a3 and a4 is read, and the read effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. At this time, as the mode of the performance symbols a3 and a4 to be stopped and displayed, the mode designated by the normal-symbol appearing eye information stored in the normal-symbol appearing eye information storage area is set. As a result, stop display of the performance symbols a3 and a4 is started according to the set performance control table. At this time, as the mode of the effect symbols a3 and a4 to be stopped and displayed, the mode designated by the normal-symbol appearing eye information stored in the normal-symbol appearing eye information storage area is set.
In the stop effect setting process, next, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3. Then, when it is determined that the current game state is the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3, the stop effect related to the second main effect pattern a5 is set. For this, the effect control table that defines the progress of the stop effect related to the second main effect pattern a5 is read, and the read effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. At this time, as the aspect of the second main effect symbol a5 to be stopped and displayed, the aspect specified by the normal symbol appearing eye information stored in the normal symbol appearing eye information storage area is set. As a result, the stop display of the second main effect pattern a5 is started according to the set effect control table. At this time, as the mode of the second main effect symbol a5 to be stop-displayed, the mode designated by the normal-symbol appearing eye information stored in the normal-symbol appearing eye information storage area is set.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the current game state is not the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3 (when it is determined to be the normal state), the stop effect related to the second main effect pattern a5 is not set.

(Ending command reception processing)
Next, the ending command reception process will be described.
FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the ending command reception process.
The CPU of the effect control board 300 executes the ending command receiving process shown in FIG. 50 in response to receiving the ending specifying command.
In the ending command reception process, first, the process proceeds to step S54-1.
In step S54-1, a special figure appearance information replacement process is executed, and the current ending command reception process ends. In the special figure appearance information replacement process, the special figure appearance information specifying the "special lost symbol" is stored (set) in the special figure appearance information storage area.

(Power failure recovery command reception processing)
Next, the power interruption recovery command reception processing will be described.
FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing a power interruption recovery command reception process.
The CPU of the effect control board 300 executes the power interruption return command reception process shown in FIG. 51 in response to receiving the power interruption return designation command.
In the power failure recovery command reception process, first, the process proceeds to step S55-1.
In step S55-1, whether the received power failure recovery designation command designates during the occurrence of the big win game state or during the occurrence of the small win game state as the timing at which the power supply is interrupted (the timing at which the power is restored). It is determined whether or not, and if it is determined that the occurrence of the big hit game state or the occurrence of the small hit game state is specified (Yes), the process moves to step S55-2, and the occurrence of the big hit game state or If it is determined that the occurrence of the small winning game state is not specified (No), the current power interruption return command reception processing is terminated.
In step S55-2, a special figure appearance information replacement process is executed, and the current power interruption return command reception process is terminated. In the special figure appearance information replacement process, the special figure appearance information specifying the "special lost symbol" is stored (set) in the special figure appearance information storage area.

(Action of pachinko machine 1)
In the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 200 (steps S11-6, S11-7, S11-11) that executes the starting determination, and the special figure appearing information that stores the special figure appearing information according to the result of the starting determination It is provided with a storage area and an effect control board 300 (steps S50-6, S51-1) for controlling the display of the effect symbols a1, a2, a5 based on the special figure appearing information. In particular, when "big hit" or "small hit" (hereinafter referred to as "specific result") is determined by the start determination, the stop of the production patterns a1, a2, a5 based on the special figure appearing information corresponding to the specific result After the display is executed, it is possible to change to the special figure appearing information that does not correspond to the specified result (special figure appearing information that corresponds to the non-specified result (specifically, "loss")).
That is, in the pachinko machine 1, when the specific result is determined by the start determination, after the stop display of the production symbols a1, a2, and a5 based on the special figure appearance information corresponding to the specification result is executed, the special figure appearance is executed. The special figure appearance information stored in the information storage area changes from special figure appearance information corresponding to the specific result to special figure appearance information that does not correspond to the specific result (non-specific result (specifically, "miss" ) is changed to the special figure appearance information corresponding to).
By this, after executing the stop display of the production symbols a1, a2, and a5 based on the special figure appearance information corresponding to the specified result, the special figure appearance information stored in the special figure appearance information storage area is specified. Changed and changed from the special figure eye information corresponding to the result to the special figure eye information not corresponding to the specific result (special figure eye information corresponding to the non-specific result (specifically, "miss")) Based on the later special figure appearing information, it is possible to start the variable display of the effect symbols a1, a2 and a5. Therefore, the mode of the performance symbols a1, a2, a5 in the stop display can be made different from the mode of the performance symbols a1, a2, a5 at the start of the next variable display. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of display.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, when the specific result is determined by the start determination, after the stop display of the production symbols a1, a2, and a5 based on the special figure appearance information corresponding to the specification result is executed, the special figure appearance The special figure appearance information stored in the information storage area is changed from the special figure appearance information corresponding to the specific result to the special figure appearance information that is not set according to the result of the start determination.
This makes it possible to grasp that the special figure appearance information has been changed by the effect symbols a1, a2 and a5 displayed based on the special figure appearance information after the change.
In addition, in the present invention, when the specific result is determined by the starting determination, "after the stop display of the production symbols a1, a2, a5 based on the special figure appearing information corresponding to the specific result is executed", to the specific result It is configured to be changed to special figure appearance information that does not correspond. Here, "after the stop display of the effect symbols a1, a2, and a5 based on the special symbol appearing information corresponding to the specific result is executed" means that the special game is being executed based on the start determination in which the specific result is determined. , During the period before the game state shifts to a different game state (time saving state) based on the start determination in which the specific result is determined, the game state is normal based on the start determination in which the specific result is determined It means during the period after shifting to another game state (big hit game state or small hit game state).
In particular, in the present embodiment, the start time of the ending period is defined as the predetermined timing for changing the special figure appearance information. However, the predetermined timing for changing the special figure appearance information can be changed as appropriate during the display prohibition period. For example, as the predetermined timing for changing the special figure eye information, the start of the display prohibition period (start of the opening period), the end of the display prohibition period (start of the ending period), etc. may be specified. .

1 pachinko machine 11 game board 200 main control board 300 effect control board a1 special figure mini effect pattern a2 special figure fourth effect pattern a2
a5 main production pattern

Claims (2)

game determination means for executing game determination;
a storage means for storing pattern information according to the result of the game determination;
and a display control means for controlling the display of the pattern based on the pattern information,
When a specific result is determined by the game determination, the pattern information can be changed to the pattern information not corresponding to the specific result after the stop display of the pattern based on the pattern information corresponding to the specific result is executed. Amusement machine. 2. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the symbol information can be changed to the symbol information that is not set according to the result of the game determination.

Images